PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPΣ User's Manual

Manual text content

http://www.naisplc.com PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP Σ User’s Manual [Applicable PLC] • FP Σ –C32 Control unit (Part No. FPG–C32T) Table of Contents FP Σ i Table of Contents Before You Start vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Tool Restrictions x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Unit Types 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 FP Σ Control Unit 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Expansion Unit, Power Supply Unit and Intelligent Unit 1 - 6 . . . . . . 1.2.3 Communication Cassette 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Restrictions on the Number of Expansion Units 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Controllable I/O Points 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Programming Tools 1 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Tools Needed for Programming 1 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 1 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Tool Port Specification 2 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Communication Cassette 2 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Input and Output Specifications 2 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Input Specifications 2 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Output Specifications 2 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram 2 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 I/O Allocation and Expansion Method . 3.1 I/O Allocation 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 I/O Number of FP Σ Control Unit 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 I/O Number of FP0 Expansion Unit 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 I/O Number of FP0 Analog I/O Unit 3 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 I/O Number of FP0 A/D Conversion Unit 3 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.5 I/O Number of FP0 I/O Link Unit 3 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Adding Expansion Units 3 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Expansion Method 3 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents FP Σ ii Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring 4.1 Installation 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Installation Environment and Space 4 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Installation and Removal 4 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Grounding 4 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Wiring of Input and Output 4 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Input Wiring 4 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Output Wiring 4 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings 4 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type 4 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Safety Measures 4 - 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Safety Measures 4 - 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Momentary Power Failures 4 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections 4 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Backup Battery 4 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Installation of Backup Battery 4 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 System Register Setting 4 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Lifetime of Backup Battery 4 - 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5.1 Overview of Each Functions 5 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built–in High–speed Counter 5 - 3 . . . . . 5.1.2 Performance of Built–in High–speed Counter 5 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 5 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Table of Specifications 5 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Function being Used and Restrictions 5 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Overview of High–speed Counter Function 5 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Types of Input Modes 5 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Min. Input Pulse Width 5 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 I/O Allocation 5 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Instructions Used with High–speed Counter Function 5 - 13 . . . . . . . 5.3.6 Sample Program 5 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents FP Σ iii 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function 5 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method 5 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 I/O Allocation 5 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Control Mode 5 - 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function 5 - 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 Sample Program for Positioning Control 5 - 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Overview of PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Communication Cassette 6.1 Communication Functions of FP Σ 6 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Functions of Communication Cassette 6 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Communication Cassette 6 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Type of Communication Cassette 6 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports 6 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Communication Specifications of Communication Cassette 6 - 8 . . 6.3 Attachment of Communication Cassette 6 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Attachment Procedure 6 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Wiring of Communication Cassette 6 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Wiring the Connector with the Communication Cassette 6 - 11 . . . . . 6.4.2 Tool for Tightening Communication Connector Terminal Block 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Wiring Method 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Cautions Regarding Wiring 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Overview of Function 7 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Explanation of Operation when Using a Computer Link 7 - 4 . . . . . 7.1.3 Format of Command and Response 7 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.4 Types of Commands that Can Be Used 7 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.5 Setting the Communication Parameters when Using a Computer Link 7 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.6 Restriction 7 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with computer) 7 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with programmable display “GT10”) 7 - 14 . . . . . Table of Contents FP Σ iv 7.3 Computer Link (1:N communication) 7 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Overview of 1:N Communication 7 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Communication Cassette Used for 1:N Communication 7 - 18 . . . . . 7.3.3 Settings of System Register and Unit No. 7 - 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.4 Connection with External Device 7 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8 Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 Overview of Function 8 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 Program of General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 5 . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 Communication Parameter Settings when Using General–purpose Serial Communications 8 - 6 . . . . . . 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Data Transmission to External Device 8 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Receiving Data from External Device 8 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with Micro–Imagechecker) 8 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with FP series PLC) 8 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP Σ 8 - 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 1:N communication 8 - 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Overview of 1:N Communication 8 - 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Communication Cassette Used with 1 : N Communication 8 - 31 . . . 8.5.3 Setting of System Register 8 - 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 8 - 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 When “STX not exist” is Set for Start Code and “CR” is Set for End Code 8 - 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 When “STX” is Set for Start Code and “ETX” is Set for End Code 8 - 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM. Port 8 - 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents FP Σ v Chapter 9 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9.1 PLC Link 9 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Overview of Function 9 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Setting of Communication Mode 9 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Setting of Unit No. 9 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Allocation of Link Relay and Link Register 9 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Connection Example of PLC Link 9 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Using a PLC Link with Three FP Σ Units 9 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2 Sample Programs 9 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10 Other Functions 10.1 Analog Potentiometer 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 Example Showing How the Analog Potentiometers are Used 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Area for Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Setting of Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Precautions Concerning Backup of Clock/Calendar Data 10 - 5 . . . . 10.2.4 Example Showing the Clock/Calendar being Used 10 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11 Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11.1 Self–Diagnostic Function 11 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition 11 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 Operation on Error 11 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Flashes 11 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Lights 11 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 If None of the LEDs Light 11 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.4 If Outputting does not Occur as Desired 11 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.5 If a Protect Error Message Appears 11 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.6 If the Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.7 If a Transmission Error has Occurred 11 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents FP Σ vi Chapter 12 Specifications 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 General Specifications 12 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 Performance Specifications 12 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 I/O No. Allocation 12 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants 12 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 Table of System Registers 12 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 System Registers 12 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Table of System Registers 12 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 Table of Error Cords 12 - 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.1 Table of Syntax Check Error 12 - 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.2 Table of Self–Diagnostic Error 12 - 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 MEWTOCOL–COM Communication commands 12 - 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD 12 - 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 ASCII Codes 12 - 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index I - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Record of changes R - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Start FP Σ vii Before You Start Installation environment Do not use the FP Σ unit where it will be exposed to the following: Direct sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the range of 0  C to 55  C/32  F to 131  F. Ambient humidity outside the range of 30% to 85% RH and sudden temperature changes causing condensation. Inflammable or corresive gas. Excessive vibration or shock. Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or salts. Water or oil in any from including spray or mist. Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda. Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges. Static electricity Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity. In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause problems. Cleaning Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform the unit case and fade the colors. Power supplies An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power supply for the control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed. If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse. Before You Start FP Σ viii Power supply sequence Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the power supply for input and output. If the power supply for input and output is turned off before the power supply of the control unit, the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation. Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given below. When performing installation, check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring, particularly conductive fragments, adhering to the unit. Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power supply voltage are all correct. Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws. Set the mode selector to PROG. mode. Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program. Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver.2 Procedure: 1. Select “Online Edit Mode” on the FPWIN GR “On line” menu. 2. Select “Clear Program” on the “Edit” menu. 3. When the confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on “Yes” to clear the program. Before You Start FP Σ ix Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs, the user should consider the following measures. Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs, destroying files, or overwriting the contents of a file, documents should be printed out and then saved. Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten. If the password is forgotten, however, it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to. Also, if a password is forcibly bypassed, the program is deleted. When specifying the password, note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point. Programming Tool Restrictions FP Σ x Programming Tool Restrictions Type of programming tool Instruction used/function restrictions FPWIN GR Ver.2 All instructions and functions can be used. Software for Windows FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used NPST–GR Ver.4 Software for MS–DOS NPST–GR Ver.3 Not used AFP1114V2 Handy programming AFP1114 unit (FP programmer) AFP1112A AFP1112 Not used Note Precautions concerning programming tools Programming tools used with the FP Σ require Ver. 2 or a subsequent version of the FPWIN GR. Please be aware that other tools cannot be used. Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Unit Types 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 FP Σ Control Unit 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Expansion Unit, Power Supply Unit and Intelligent Unit 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Communication Cassette 1 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Restrictions on the Number of Expansion Units 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Controllable I/O Points 1 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Programming Tools 1 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Tools Needed for Programming 1 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 1 - 8 . . FP Σ Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 - 2 FP Σ 1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 - 3 1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit Powerful control capabilities All of the functions of a mid–scale PLC are packed into the compact body size of the 32–point type FP0. A program capacity of 12 k steps is provided as a standard feature, so you never have to worry about how much memory is left as you’re programming. In addition, 32 k words are reserved for data registers, so large volumes of data can be compiled and multiple operations can be processed without running out of memory. A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port (RS232C) provided as a standard feature on the main unit, communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer. Additionally, communication cassettes with RS232C and RS485 interfaces are available as an option. Installing a 2–channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FP Σ makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port. A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with C–NET (up to 32 units) and PLC link function (up to 16 units). Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP Σ Display panel The Tool port can be used to connect a display panel or other device. Device with RS232C port When using the 2–channel RS232C type communication cassette Two devices with RS232C port can be connected. Device with RS232C port FP Σ Figure 1: Features–communication (RS232C) A C–NET up of to 32 units is supported. Communication is possible with up to 32 units. C–NET adapter Computer When using the 1–channel RS485 type communication cassette FP Σ No.1 FP Σ No.2 FP Σ No.3 FP Σ No.32 RS485 Figure 2: Features–communication (C–NET) next page FP Σ Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 - 4 Data can be shared among up to 16 FP Σ units using the PLC link function. Data can be shared among the various PLCs using the PLC link function. When using the 1–channel RS485 type communication cassette FP Σ No.1 FP Σ No.2 FP Σ No.3 FP Σ No.16 RS485 Figure 3: Features–communication (PLC link) Positioning control supported through high–speed counter and pulse output A high–speed counter and pulse output functions are provided as standard features. The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100 kHz, enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor. Measurement using high–speed counter supported Encoder Single phase: Max. 50 kHz, Two–phase: Max. 20 kHz Encoder FP Σ Increment input mode, decrement input mode, 2–phase input mode, individual input mode, and direction discrimination mode are supported. Pulse input Pulse input Figure 4: Features–High–speed counter FP Σ Positioning control based on pulse output supported Pulse output 1–channel: Max. 100 kHz, 2–channel: Max. 60 kHz Mortor driver Pulse/sign and CW/CCW output are supported. Pulse output Mortor driver Mortor Mortor Figure 5: Features–Pulse output FP Σ 1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit 1 - 5 Analog control supported An analog potentiometer (volume dial) is provided as a standard feature. This can be used in applications such as analog timers, without using the programming tools. An analog unit is also available as the intelligent unit. FP Σ Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 - 6 1.2 Unit Types This section explains the type of unit used with the FP Σ and about the optional communication cassette. 1.2.1 FP Σ Control Unit Name Part No. FP Σ Control unit FPG–C32T 1.2.2 Expansion Unit, Power Supply Unit and Intelligent Unit The expansion unit, power supply unit and intelligent unit used with the FP Σ can also be used with the earlier FP0 series. 1.2.3 Communication Cassette A detachable communication cassette (optional) should be used when using the various functions such as the computer link, serial data communication, and PLC link functions. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. FPG–COM1 FP Σ Communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communica- tion with two external devices is possible. FPG–COM2 FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS485 type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a two–wire RS485 port. It supports 1 : N computer links (C– NET), general–purpose serial communication, and a PLC link. FPG–COM3 FP Σ 1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 - 7 1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations This section contains restrictions on unit combinations. 1.3.1 Restrictions on the Number of Expansion Units FP Σ Control unit Expansion unit or intelligent unit (Maximum possible expansion is with a total of 3 units) Expansion unit or intelligent unit Expansion unit or intelligent unit Figure 6: Restriction on unit combinations A maximum of three FP0 expansion units or FP0 intelligent units can be connected to the FP Σ control unit. There are no restrictions on the type and the order in which expansion units are installed. A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible. 1.3.2 Controllable I/O Points No. of I/O points in control unit No. of expansion I/O points 32 points Max. 128 points FP Σ Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 - 8 1.4 Programming Tools This section explains about the programming tools for FP Σ . 1.4.1 Tools Needed for Programming FP Σ Computer PC connection cable 1 Programming tool software The tool software can also be used with the FP series. The “FPWIN GR Ver. 2” Windows software is used with the FP Σ . The earlier FPWIN GR Ver. 1x, NPST–GR, and FP Pro- grammer cannot be used. 2 PC connection cable This cable needed for connection between the FP Σ and the computer. When connecting to a computer (IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible), use a commercially available adapter. Programming tool software FP Σ Figure 7: Programming tools 1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Type and environment for software Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disk capacity FPWIN GR Ver.2 Windows95/98/Me/2000/NT(V er.4.0 or later) 30MB or more Type of computer and suitable cable Type of computer Cable Adapter IBM PC/AT or its compatible machine Part No.: AFC8513 Commercially available 9–pin–25–pin conversion adapter (e.g. AT–925S by Data Spec.) IBM PS/2 machine Part No.: AFC8513 Commercially available 25–pin male–female conversion adapter (e.g. MF335 by Data Spec.) Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Tool Port Specification 2 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Communication Cassette 2 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Input and Output Specifications 2 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Input Specifications 2 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Output Specifications 2 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram 2 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 2 FP Σ 2.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 3 2.1 Parts and Functions This section explains about the parts and functions of FP Σ control unit. 2.1.1 Parts and Functions Front view Left side view Right side view DIN standard rail attachment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 14 15 Figure 8: FP Σ Parts and Functions FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 4 1 Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error. LED LED and operation status RUN (green) Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed. It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately.) PROG. (green) Lights when in the PROG. mode and indicates that operation has stopped. It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately.) ERROR/ALARM (red) Flashes when an error is detected during the self-diagnostic function. Lights if a hardware error occurs, or if operation slows because of the program, and the watchdog timer is activated. 2 RUN/PROG. mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC. Switch position Operation mode RUN (upward) This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed and operation begins. PROG. (downward) This sets the PROG. mode. The operation stops. In this mode, programming can be done using tools. When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the position of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status indicator LED. Otherwise, restart the FP Σ and change the mode of operation with the RUN/PROG. mode switch. 3 Communication status LEDs These display the communication status of the COM.1 and COM.2 ports. LED LED and communication status COM.1 S Transmitted data Flashes while data is being transmitted monitor Goes out when no data is being transmitted R Received data Flashes while data is being received monitor Goes out when no data is being received COM.2 S Transmitted data mo- Flashes while data is being transmitted nitor Goes out when no data is being transmitted R Received data Flashes while data is being received monitor Goes out when no data is being received 4 Tool port (RS232C) This port is used to connect a programming tool. 5 Input connector (10 pins × 2) 6 Input indicator LEDs FP Σ 2.1 Parts and Functions 2 - 5 7 Output connector (10 pins × 2) 8 Output indicator LEDs 9 Analog potentiometer (analog dial) Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within the range of K0 to K1000. It can be used for analog timers and other applications. 10 Power supply connector (24 V DC) Supply 24 V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFP0581) that comes with the unit. 11 Unit (Station) number setting switch This unit (station) number is specified when using the communication functions provided on the optional communication cassettes. The unit (station) number setting switch is located under the cover on the back of the unit. Specify the unit (station) number using the selector switch and the dial. Figure 9: FP Σ Parts and Functions (Unit No. setting switch) 12 Communication cassette (option) This is the optional cassette type adapter used when communication is carried out. Any one of the following the cassette types may be installed. – 1–channel RS232C type – 2–channel RS232C type – 1–channel RS485 type 13 Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units. The hook is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate (AFP0804). 14 Expansion connector Connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit. 15 DIN rail attachment lever The FP Σ unit enables attachment at a touch to a DIN rail. The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate (AFP0811). FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 6 2.1.2 Tool Port Specification A commercial mini–DIN 5–pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit. Pin no. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction 1 Signal Ground SG — 2 Transmitted Data SD Unit → External device 3 Received Data RD Unit ← External device 4 (Not used) — — 5 + 5 V + 5 V Unit → External device Figure 10: FP Σ Parts and Functions (Tool port) The following are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system registers should be used to change these. – Baud rate 9600 bps . . . . . . – Character bit 8 bit . . . – Parity check Odd parity . . . . – Stop bit length 1 bit . . 2.1.3 Communication Cassette The detachable communication cassette (optional) can be selected from among the three types shown below. Type Applicable communication function Terminal layout diagram 1–channel RS232C type Computer link General–purpose serial communication SD: Transmitted Data (Output) RD: Received Data (Input) RS: Request to Send (Output) CS: Clear to Send (Input) SG: Signal Ground 2–channel RS232C type Computer link General–purpose serial communication S1: Transmitted Data (Output) (COM.1) R1: Received Data (Input) (COM.1) S2: Transmitted Data (Output) (COM.2) R2: Received Data (Input) (COM.2) SG: Signal Ground (COM.1 and 2) 1–channel RS485 type Computer link General–purpose serial communication PLC link General station Terminal station Short 1 3 5 4 2 FP Σ 2.2 Input and Output Specifications 2 - 7 2.2 Input and Output Specifications This section contains input and output specifications of FP Σ control unit. 2.2.1 Input Specifications Input specifications Item Description Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Rated input current For X0, X1, X3, X4: approx. 8 mA For X2, X5 to X7: approx. 4.3 mA For X8 to XF: approx. 3.5 mA Input points per common 16 points/common (Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal.) Min. on voltage/Min. on current For X0, X1, X3, X4: 19.2 V DC/6 mA For X2, X5 to XF: 19.2 V DC/3 mA Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1.3 mA Input impedance For X0, X1, X3, X4: 3 k Ω For X2, X5 to X7: 5.6 k Ω For X8 to XF: 6.8 k Ω Response time off → on For X0, X1, X3, X4: 5 μ s or less For X2, X5 to X7: 100 μ s or less For X8 to XF: 2 ms or less on → off Same as above Operating mode indicator LED display Note X0 through X7 are inputs for the high-speed counter and have a fast response time. If used as normal inputs, we recommend inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise may be interpreted as an input signal. Also, the above specifications apply when the rated input voltage is 24 VDC and the temperature is 25 ° C/70 ° F. FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 8 Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the temperature. 16 8 46/ 107.8 52/ 118.6 55/ 124 [C32T] at 24 V DC at 26.4 V DC 12 Ambient temperature ( ° C/ ° F) Number of points per common which are si- multaneous on Figure 11: FP Σ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Internal circuit diagram [X0, X1, X3, X4] Internal circuit 510 Ω 3 k Ω Xn COM Figure 12: FP Σ Internal circuit diagram (Input–1) Xn COM [X2, X5 to XF] Internal circuit R1 R2 For X2 and X5 to X7, R1: 5.6 k Ω , R2: 1 k Ω For X8 to XF, R1: 6.8 k Ω , R2: 820 Ω Figure 13: FP Σ Internal circuit diagram (Input–2) FP Σ 2.2 Input and Output Specifications 2 - 9 2.2.2 Output Specifications Transistor output specifications Item Description Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC Operating load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4 V DC Max. load current For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 0.3 A For Y2, Y5 to YF: 0.1 A Max. surge current For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 0.9 A For Y2, Y5 to YF: 0.5 A Output points per common 16 points/common Off state leakage current 100 μ A or less On state voltage drop 1.5 V or less Response time off → on For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4 (at 15 mA or more): 2 μ s or less For Y2, Y5 to YF: 1 ms or less on → off For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4 (at 15 mA or more): 8 μ s or less For Y2, Y5 to YF: 1 ms or less External power supply for Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC supply for driving internal circuit Current 70 mA or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Thermal protection for Y2, Y5 to YF Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature. 16 8 46/ 107.8 52/ 118.6 55/ 124 [C32T] at 24 V DC at 26.4 V DC 12 Ambient temperature ( ° C/ ° F) Number of points per common which are si- multaneous on Figure 14: FP Σ Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 10 Internal circuit diagram Internal circuit Output indicator LED + Output Load 0 V Load power supply 5 to 24 V DC Output circuit External power supply 24 V DC [Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4] Figure 15: FP Σ Internal circuit diagram (output–1) [Y2, Y5 to YF] Internal circuit Output indicator LED Output circuit + Output Load 0 V Load power supply 5 to 24 V DC External power supply 24 V DC Phase fault protection circuit Figure 16: FP Σ Internal circuit diagram (output–2) FP Σ 2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram 2 - 11 2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram Intput X0–7 COM X5 X7 X1 X3 COM X4 X6 X0 X2 COM XD XF X9 XB COM XC XE X8 XA X0 X1 X8–F X8 X9 Output Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 (+) Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 L L L L L L L L YD YF Y9 YB (+) YC YE Y8 YA L L L L L L L L Y0 Y1 Y9 Y8 (–) Y0–7 Y8–F (–) (Connector front view) Figure 17: FP Σ Terminal layout diagram (I/O connector) Notes The four COM terminals of input circuit are connected internally. The two (+) terminals of output circuit are connected internally. The two (–) terminals of output circuit are connected internally. FP Σ Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 - 12 Chapter 3 I/O Allocation and Expansion Method 3.1 I/O Allocation 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 I/O Number of FP Σ Control Unit 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 I/O Number of FP0 Expansion Unit 3 - 3 . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 I/O Number of FP0 Analog I/O Unit 3 - 4 . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 I/O Number of FP0 A/D Conversion Unit 3 - 4 . . . 3.1.5 I/O Number of FP0 I/O Link Unit 3 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Adding Expansion Units 3 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Expansion Method 3 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ I/O Allocation and Expansion Method 3 - 2 FP Σ 3.1 I/O Allocation 3 - 3 3.1 I/O Allocation This section explains about the I/O allocation of FP Σ . Control unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion (Maximum possible expansion is with a total of 3 units.) Figure 18: FP Σ I/O allocation 3.1.1 I/O Number of FP Σ Control Unit The I/O allocation of FP Σ control unit is fixed. Unit Transistor output type Input (16 points) X0 to XF Output (16 points) Y0 to YF 3.1.2 I/O Number of FP0 Expansion Unit I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added. The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location. Type of expansion unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion E8X Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Input (4 points) X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 E8R Output (4 points) Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 E8YR/E8YT/E8YP Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E16R/E16T/E16P Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16YT/E16YP Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F E32T/E32P Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F FP Σ I/O Allocation and Expansion Method 3 - 4 3.1.3 I/O Number of FP0 Analog I/O Unit The I/O allocation of FP0 analog I/O unit “FP0–A21” is determined by the installation location. Unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion CH0 (16 points) WX2 (X20 to X2F) WX4 (X40 to X4F) WX6 (X60 to X6F) Input CH1 (16 points) WX3 (X30 to X3F) WX5 (X50 to X5F) WX7 (X70 to X7F) Output (16 points) WY2 (Y20 to Y2F) WY4 (Y40 to Y4F) WY6 (Y60 to Y6F) 3.1.4 I/O Number of FP0 A/D Conversion Unit The I/O allocation of FP0 A/D conversion unit “FP0–A80” is determined by the installation location. The data for the various channels is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data. Unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion CH0 (16 points) CH2 (16 points) CH4 (16 points) WX2 (X20 to X2F) WX4 (X40 to X4F) WX6 (X60 to X6F) CH6 (16 points) Input CH1 (16 points) CH3 (16 points) CH5 (16 points) WX3 (X30 to X3F) WX5 (X50 to X5F) WX7 (X70 to X7F) CH7 (16 points) 3.1.5 I/O Number of FP0 I/O Link Unit The I/O allocation of FP0 I/O link unit “FP0–IOL” is determined by the installation location. Unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion Input (32 points) X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output (32 points) Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F FP Σ 3.1 I/O Allocation 3 - 5 Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP Σ and the FP0, the same numbers are used for input and output. Example: The same number “X20 and Y20” can be used for input and output Tip Expression of numbers for input/output relays Since input relay “X” and output relay “Y” are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below. I/O number of FP Σ and FP0 Decimal 1, 2, 3 ...... Hexadecimal 1, 2, 3 ...... 9, A, B ... F X FP Σ I/O Allocation and Expansion Method 3 - 6 3.2 Adding Expansion Units Because unit expansion is done using the expansion connector and hook on the side of the unit, no expansion cable is needed. 3.2.1 Expansion Method 1 Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal expansion connector is exposed. Peel the seal. Figure 19: Expansion method procedure–1 2 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screw- driver. Figure 20: Expansion method procedure–2 3 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units. Figure 21: Expansion method procedure–3 4 Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure the unit. Figure 22: Expansion method procedure–4 Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring 4.1 Installation 4 – 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Installation Environment and Space 4 - 3 . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Installation and Removal 4 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Grounding 4 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Wiring of Input and Output 4 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Input Wiring 4 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Output Wiring 4 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings 4 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type 4 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Safety Measures 4 - 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Safety Measures 4 - 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Momentary Power Failures 4 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections 4 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Backup Battery 4 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Installation of Backup Battery 4 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 System Register Setting 4 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Lifetime of Backup Battery 4 - 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 2 FP Σ 4.1 Installation 4 - 3 4.1 Installation This section explains installation environment and installation method of FP Σ . 4.1.1 Installation Environment and Space Avoid installing the unit in the following locations: – Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 ° C to 55 ° C/32 ° F to 131 ° F – Ambient humidity outside the range of 30% to 85% RH – Sudden temperature changes causing condensation – Inflammable or corrosive gases – Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or salts – Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda – Excessive vibration or shock – Direct sunlight – Water or oil in any form including spray or mist Measures regarding noise: – Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges – If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the above countermeasures are taken, it is recommended to supply power through an insulation transformer, noise filter, or like
FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 4 Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat. CORRECT Figure 23: FP Σ Installation–heat discharge Do not install the FP Σ control unit as shown below. Upside–down Installation which blocks the air duct Installations such that the input and output connectors face down Input and output connectors on top Horizontal installation of the unit INCORRECT Figure 24: FP Σ Installation direction Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters, transformers or large scale resistors. FP Σ 4.1 Installation 4 - 5 Installation space Leave at least 50 mm/1.97 in. of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement. 50 mm/1.97 in. or more 50 mm/1.97 in. or more Figure 25: FP Σ Installation space–1 Maintain a minimum of 100 mm/3.937 in. between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit. 100 mm/ 3.937 in. or more PLC unit Panel door Other device Figure 26: FP Σ Installation space–2 Keep the first 100 mm/3.937 in. from the front surface of the control unit open in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring. FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 6 4.1.2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail The FP Σ unit enables simple attachment to DIN rails. Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail. 2 Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position. 1 2 Figure 27: Installation method Procedure of removal method 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever. 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards. 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail. 1 2 3 Figure 28: Removal method FP Σ 4.1 Installation 4 - 7 Installation using the optional mounting plate When using the slim 30 type mounting plate (AFP0811) Use M4 size pan–head screws for attachment of the slim 30 type mounting plate to mounting panel and install according to the dimensions shown below. 90 mm/3.54 in. 30 mm/ 1.18 in. 30 mm/ 1.18 in. 6 mm/0.24 in. 10 mm/0.39 in. Figure 29: FP Σ Installation–optional slim 30 type mounting plate The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails. Removal Installation 1 4 1 2 3 Figure 30: FP Σ Installation using slim 30 type mounting plate When using an expansion unit, tighten the screws after joining all of the slim 30 type mounting plate to be connected. Tighten the screws at each of the four corners. 30.0 mm/1.18 in. 60.0 mm/2.36 in Example: Two expansion units Figure 31: FP Σ Installation using two expansion units FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 8 When using the flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) Use M4 size pan–head screws for attachment of the flat type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below. 60.0 mm/ 2.36 in. Figure 32: FP Σ Installation–optional flat type mounting plate Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit. Align the expansion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks on the top and bottom. Removal Installation Figure 33: FP Σ Installation using flat type mounting plate An unit with an attached flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail. DIN rail Figure 34: FP Σ Installation on DIN rail using flat type mounting plate Note The flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) cannot be used for an expansion unit. FP Σ 4.2 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 9 4.2 Wiring of Power Supply This section explains power supply wiring of FP Σ . 4.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply Use the power supply cable provided as an accessory to supply power to the unit. Power supply cable Power supply cable (AFP0581) Green: Function earth Blue: 0 V Brown: 24 V DC Figure 35: FP Σ Wiring of power supply Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable (Part No.: AFP0581) that comes with the unit to connect the power supply. –Brown: 24 V DC –Blue: 0 V –Green: Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable. Power supply type To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit. The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type. If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit, always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse. Power supply voltage Rated voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 10 Wiring system Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit, input/output devices, and mechanical power apparatus. Mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker Input/Output devices Insulated DC power supply Control unit Figure 36: FP Σ Power supply wiring system Measures regarding power supply sequence (start up sequence) The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input/output power supplies. If the input/output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit, the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation. Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply, and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both. FP Σ 4.2 Wiring of Power Supply 4 - 11 4.2.2 Grounding Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression. For grounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm 2 . The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Ω . The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as short as possible. If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive ground for each device. Other device (Inverter etc.) CORRECT INCORRECT Other device (Inverter etc.) Figure 37: FP Σ Grounding Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems. Example: Since the power supply line of the FP Σ power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth, the varistor may be shorted. 24 V DC 0V Function earth Varistor (82 V) FP Σ power supply line 24 V DC 0V Function earth Varistor (39 V) FP0 exponsion unit power supply line Figure 38: Power supply line of FP Σ and FP0 expansion unit FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 12 4.3 Wiring of Input and Output This section explains input wiring and output wiring of FP Σ . 4.3.1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Internal circuit Input terminal COM Power supply for input Power supply for sensor Sensor Relay Relay output type FP Σ Figure 39: FP Σ Relay output type sensor COM Output Vcc 0 V NPN open collector output type Internal circuit Input terminal FP Σ Power supply for input Sensor Figure 40: FP Σ NPN open collector output type sensor Voltage output (Universal output) type COM Output Vcc 0 V Internal circuit Input terminal FP Σ Power supply for input Sensor Figure 41: FP Σ Voltage output (universal output) type sensor COM Output Internal circuit Input terminal Two-wire output type FP Σ Power supply for input Sensor Figure 42: FP Σ Two–wire output type sensor FP Σ 4.3 Wiring of Input and Output 4 - 13 Precaution when using LED–equipped lead switch When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED-equipped lead switch, make sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 19.2 V DC. In particular, take care when connecting a number of switches in series. LED– equipped lead switch COM 24 V 19.2 V or more LED contact Input terminal FP Σ Figure 43: FP Σ Precaution when using LED–equipped lead switch Precaution when using two–wire type sensor If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two-wire type sensor “photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor”, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below. Two–wire type sensor Bleeder resistor COM Input terminal Internal circuit R FP Σ Figure 44: FP Σ Precaution when using two–wire type sensor The off voltage of the input is 2.4 V, therefore, select the value of bleeder resistor “R” so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2.4 V. The input impedance is 5.6 k Ω . ( I : Sensor’s leakage current (mA)) The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R The formula is based on an input impedance of 5.6 k Ω . The input impedance varies depend- ing on the input terminal number. The wattage W of the resistor is: In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W. 13.44 (Power supply voltage) 2 R (k Ω ) 5.6 x I –2.4 W = FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 14 Precaution when using LED–equipped limit switch If the input of PLC does not turn off because of the leakage current from the LED- equipped limit switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below. r: Internal resistor of limit switch (k
) LED– equipped limit switch Bleeder resistor COM Input terminal Internal circuit R Power supply for input r FP Σ Figure 45: FP Σ Precaution when using LED–equipped limit switch The off voltage of input is 2.4 V, therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V, select the bleeder resistor “R” so that the current will be greater than I = The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is: R The wattage W of the resistor is: W = In the actual selection, use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W. 13.44 5.6 x I – 2.4 (k Ω ) 24 - 2.4 r (Power supply voltage) 2 R FP Σ 4.3 Wiring of Input and Output 4 - 15 4.3.2 Output Wiring Protective circuit for inductive loads With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load. Output terminal Load Diode COM FP Σ Figure 46: FP Σ Protective circuit for inductive load Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a protection circuit as shown below. Load Resistor Output terminal COM Load Inductor Output terminal COM FP Σ FP Σ Figure 47: FP Σ Precautions when using capacitive loads About the short–circuit protective circuit To prevent the output circuit from being damaged by a short–circuit or other electrical problems on the output side, a transistor with short–circuit protection is provided. 4.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity. Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and these wirings are separated from the power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together. Separate the input/output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm/3.937 in. FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 16 4.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and Suitable wires The connector “housings, semi-cover and welders” listed below come supplied with the FP Σ control unit. Use the wires given below. Also, use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires. Figure 48: FP Σ Supplied MIL connector Supplied connector (AFP0807) Type and Product No. Housing 10–pin type only Semi–cover AXW61001 Welder (contact) AXW7221 Suitable wires Size Conductor cross–sectional area Insulation thickness AWG#22 0.3 mm 2 dia. 1.5 to dia. 1.1 AWG#24 0.2 mm 2 Pressure connection tool Product No. AXY52000 Figure 49: FP Σ Pressure connection tool FP Σ 4.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type 4 - 17 Procedure of assembly (Wiring method) The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire’s insulation, saving labor. 1 Bend the welder (contact) back from the carrier, and set it in the pressure connection tool. Figure 50: FP Σ MIL connector assembly procedure–1 2 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops, and lightly grip the tool. Figure 51: FP Σ MIL connector assembly procedure–2 3 After press-fitting the wire, insert it into the housing. Figure 52: FP Σ MIL connector assembly procedure–3 4 When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi-cover into place. Figure 53: FP Σ MIL connector assembly procedure–4 FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 18 Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section. If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure-connected, the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact. Figure 54: FP Σ MIL connector–rewiring If using a MIL connector for flat cables, specify the product no. AXM110915. Tip FP Σ 4.5 Safety Measures 4 - 19 4.5 Safety Measures This section explains the safety measures, momentary power failures and protection of power supply and output. 4.5.1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons: Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input/output or mechanical power apparatus Responce time lag when a momentary power drop occurs Abnormality in the PLC unit, external power supply, or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequates safety measures listed in the following: Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit externally. Emergency stop circuit Add an emergency stop circuit externally to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs. Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To keep this sequence, the following measures are recommended: Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG. mode, and then switch to the RUN mode. Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note When stopping the operation of the PLC also, have the input/output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating. Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching, such as inverters, do not ground them together. Use an exclusive ground for each device. FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 20 4.5.2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 4 ms, the FP Σ continues to operate. If the power is off for 4 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination of units, the power supply voltage, and other factors. (In some cases, operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset.) 4.5.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections Power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power supply for the control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed. If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse. Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally. FP Σ 4.6 Backup Battery 4 - 21 4.6 Backup Battery This section explains installation, lifetime of backup battery and battery alarm error function setting. 4.6.1 Installation of Backup Battery Installing a backup battery in the FP Σ makes it possible to access clock/calendar functions for use, in addition to backing up data registers and other data. 1 Using a screwdriver or similar tool, open the battery cover. Figure 55: FP Σ Backup battery installation procedure–1 2 Connect the connector, and place the battery so that the battery terminal fits between the two tabs. Figure 56: FP Σ Backup battery installation procedure–2 3 Insert the battery cover from above. Figure 57: FP Σ Backup battery installation procedure–3 FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 22 4.6.2 System Register Setting Setting the battery error alarm In the system register default settings, “No. 4 Alarm Battery Error” is set to “Off”. When using the battery, set system register No. 4 of the control unit so that the battery error alarm is turned on. Setting procedure using FPWIN GR 1. Select “PLC Configuration” on the “Option” menu, and click on “Action on Error” tab. 2. Turn on “No. 4 Alarm Battery Error” check box. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 58: FPWIN GR – PLC Configuration setting dialog box Specifying the hold area In order to use backup functions such as data registers, settings must be entered for system registers Nos. 6 to 12. For hold area setting using FPWIN GR, select “PLC Configuration” on the “Option” menu, and click on “Hold/Non–hold 1” and “Hold/Non–hold 2”. FP Σ 4.6 Backup Battery 4 - 23 4.6.3 Lifetime of Backup Battery The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to replace it with a new battery periodically. Refer to the table below for a guide as to when to replace the battery. Item Description Battery lifetime 220 days or more (typical lifetime in actual use: approx. 840 days at 25 ° C/70 ° F) (Suggested replacement interval: 1 year) (Value when no power at all is supplied) Maintenance battery Name Part No. Battery for FP Σ AFPG804 Notes If system register “No. 4 Alarm Battery Error” is set to “ON”, special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops, and the ERROR/ALARM LED will flash. The battery remains effective for about a week after the alarm is issued, but in some cases the problem is not detected immediately. The battery should be replaced as soon as possible, without turning off the power supply. When replacing the battery, connect the new battery within 20 seconds of removing the old one. FP Σ Installation and Wiring 4 - 24 Chapter 5 High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5.1 Overview of Each Functions 5 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built–in High–speed Counter 5 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Performance of Built–in High–speed Counter 5 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 5 - 5 . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Table of Specifications 5 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Function being Used and Restrictions 5 - 7 . . . . . . 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Overview of High–speed Counter Function 5 - 9 . 5.3.2 Types of Input Modes 5 - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Min. Input Pulse Width 5 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 I/O Allocation 5 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Instructions Used with High–speed Counter Function 5 - 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6 Sample Program 5 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function 5 - 20 . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method 5 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 I/O Allocation 5 - 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Control Mode 5 - 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function 5 - 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 Sample Program for Positioning Control 5 - 35 . . . next page FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 2 5.5 PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Overview of PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function 5 - 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ 5.1 Overview of Each Functions 5 - 3 5.1 Overview of Each Functions This section explains about the functions that use built–in high–speed counter of FP Σ . 5.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built–in High–speed Counter Functions that use built–in high–speed counter There are three functions available when using the high–speed counter built into the FP Σ . Roller Cutter Tape, lead wire Cutter blade control signal START STOP signal Inverter Motor Encoder Encoder output is input to the high–speed counter High–speed counter function The high–speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders. When the count reaches the target value, this function turns on/off the desired output. Figure 59: FP Σ High–speed counter function Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 Pulse output function Combined with a commercially available motor driver, the function enables position- ing control. With the exclusive instruction, you can perform trapezoidal control, home return, and JOG operation. Pulse output CW Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Pulse output CCW Motor driver 1 Motor driver 2 Stepping motor Servo motor Stepping motor Servo motor Figure 60: FP Σ Pulse output function PWM output function By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio. When you increase the pulse width... When you decrease it... Heating increases. Heating decreases. Figure 61: FP Σ PWM output function FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 4 5.1.2 Performance of Built–in High–speed Counter Number of channel There are four channels for the built–in high–speed counter. The channel number allocated for the high–speed counter will change depending on the function being used. Counting range K–2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647 (Coded 32–bit binary) The built–in high–speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there. Max. value = Min. value = + 2,147,483,647 + 2,147,483,646 + 2,147,483,645 – 2,147,483,646 – 2,147,483,647 – 2,147,483,648 Figure 62: Counting range of high–speed counter FP Σ 5.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 5 - 5 5.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items This section contains specifications and restriction of functions. 5.2.1 Table of Specifications High–speed counter function specifications Input/output contact number being used Built–in high– Memory area being used Performance specifications Related instruc- On/off output Count input mode Input contact number (value in pa- renthe- sis is reset input) *Note speed counter chan- nel no. Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area Mini- mum input pulse width Maximum counting speed tions Specify the desired output Incre- mental input, Decre- X0 (X2) CH0 R903A DT90044 to DT90045 DT90046 to DT90047 10 μ s · Using one channel: Max. 50 kHz ( × 1–channel) from Y0 to Y7 using instruc- tion mental input X1 (X2) CH1 R903B DT90048 to DT90049 DT90050 to DT90051 · Using two channels: Max. 30 kHz ( × 2–channel) tion X3 (X5) CH2 R903C DT90200 to DT90201 DT90202 to DT90203 · Using three channels: Max. 20 kHz ( × 3–channel) F0 (MV), F1 X4 (X5) CH3 R903D DT90204 to DT90205 DT90206 to DT90207 · Using four channels: Max. 20 kHz ( × 4–channel) (DMV), F166 (HC1S), F167 (HC1R) Specify the desired output from 2–phase input, Incre- mental/ decre- X0 X1 (X2) CH0 R903A DT90044 to DT90045 DT90046 to DT90047 25 μ s · Using one channel: Max. 20 kHz ( × 1–channel) · Using (HC1R) Y0 to Y7 using instruc- tion mental input, Direc- tional distinc- tion X3 X4 (X5) CH2 R903C DT90200 to DT90201 DT90202 to DT90203 two channels: Max. 15 kHz ( × 2–channel) Note Reset input X2 can be set to either CH0 or CH1. Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3. FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 6 Pulse output function specifications Built–in Input/output contact number being used Memory area being used Maximum Related high– speed counter channel no. CW or Pulse output CCW or sign output Deviation counter clear output Home input Near home input Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area output frequency instruc- tions CH0 Y0 Y1 Y2 X2 DT90052 <bit4> R903A DT90044 to DT90045 DT90046 to DT90047 · Using one channel: Max. 100 kHz ( × 1–channel) F0 (MV), F1 (DMV), F171 CH2 Y3 Y4 Y5 X5 DT90052 <bit4> R903C DT90200 to DT90201 DT90202 to DT90203 · Using two channels: Max. 60 kHz ( × 2–channel) (SPDH), F172 (PLSH) PWM output function specifications Built–in high–speed Output contact number being used Memory area being used Output frequency (duty) Related instructions counter channel no. Control flag CH0 Y0 R903A · When the resolution is 1000, 1.5 to 12.5 kHz (0.0 to 99.9 %) F0 (MV), CH2 Y3 R903C · When the resolution is 100, 15.6 to 41.7 kHz (0 to 99 %) F1 (DMV), F173 (PWMH) FP Σ 5.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 5 - 7 5.2.2 Function being Used and Restrictions Channel The same channel cannot be used by more than one function. Function being used Channel High–speed counter function (When using single phase input mode) High–speed counter function (When using two– phase input mode) CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH0 CH2 Pulse output CH0 N/A A A A N/A A function CH2 A A N/A A A N/A A: Available N/A: Not Available Restrictions on I/O allocations The inputs and outputs allocated to the various functions listed in the table in the previous section “5.2.1” cannot be allocated to more than one function. Except for the examples noted below, inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs. Cases in which inputs and outputs can be used as exceptions Example 1: If no reset input is used in the high–speed counter function, X2 and X5 are allocated as normal inputs. Example 2: If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function, Y2 and Y5 are allocated as normal outputs. Restrictions on the execution of related instructions (F166 to F173) When any of the instructions related to the high–speed counter “ F166 to F173” are executed, the control flag (special internal relay: R903A to R903D) corresponding to the used channel turns on. Please be aware that the control flag is in progress may change while a scan is being carried out. To prevent this, an internal relay should be substituted at the beginning of the program. When the flag for a channel turns on, another instruction cannot be executed using that same channel. FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 8 Restrictions for maximum counting speed and pulse output frequency The counting speed when using the high–speed counter function will differ depending on the counting mode as shown in the table on page 5 - 5. Example 1: While in the decremental input mode and using the two channels CH0 and CH1, CH0 and CH1 can be used up to 30 kHz. Example 2: While in the two–phase input mode and using the two channels CH0 and CH2, CH0 and CH2 can be used up to 15 kHz. The maximum output frequency when using the pulse output function will differ depending on the number of channel being used as shown in the table on page 5 - 6. Example 1: When using only one channel, CH0, up to 100 kHz can be used. Example 2: When using two channels, CH0 and CH2, up to 60 kHz may be used for each channel. If using both the pulse output function and the high–speed counter function, the following combinations result. Example 1: When using one pulse output channel with a maximum output of 100 kHz, the maximum counting speed of the high–speed counter is 20 kHz in the single–phase and three channels mode. Example 2: When using one pulse output channel with a maximum output of 100 kHz, the maximum counting speed of the high–speed counter is 20 kHz in the two–phase and one channel mode. FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 9 5.3 High–speed Counter Function This section explains about the high–speed counter function of FP Σ . 5.3.1 Overview of High–speed Counter Function High–speed counter function The high–speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches the target value, turns on and off the desired output. To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match on instruction F166 (HC1S) . To turn off an output, use the target value match off instruction F167 (HC1R) . Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction. Setting the system register In order to use the high–speed counter function, it is necessary to set system register Nos. 400 and 401. 5.3.2 Types of Input Modes X0 on off 1 2 3 4 n–3 n–2 n–1 n 0 Count Incremental input mode Figure 63: FP Σ High–speed counter function – incremental input mode X0 on off n–1 n–2 n–3 n–4 3 2 1 0 n Count Decremental input mode Figure 64: FP Σ High–speed counter function – decremental input mode FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 10 X0 X1 on off on off n–1 (Incremental input: CW) 0 1 2 n Count Two–phase input mode X0 X1 on off on off n–3 (Decremental input: CCW) n–1 n n–2 2 1 Count Figure 65: FP Σ High–speed counter function – two–phase input mode X0 on off 1 2 3 2 3 4 3 0 3 2 4 1 on off X1 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing Count Individual input mode (Incremental and decremental input mode) Figure 66: FP Σ High–speed counter function – individual input mode 3 2 1 0 X0 on off 2 0 4 3 on off X1 Increasing Decreasing 1 Count Direction control mode Figure 67: FP Σ High–speed counter function – direction control mode FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 11 5.3.3 Min. Input Pulse Width The minimum input pulse width indicated below is necessary for the period T (1/frequency). T T 2 T 2 Single phase Figure 68: FP Σ High–speed counter function – min. input pulse width (single phase) T 4 T T 4 T 4 T 4 Two–phase Figure 69: FP Σ High–speed counter function – min. input pulse width (two–phase) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 12 5.3.4 I/O Allocation The inputting, as shown in the table on page 5 - 5, will differ depending on the channel number being used. The output turned on and off can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) . X0 X2 Yn * Count input Reset input On and off output When using CH0 with incremental input and reset input * The output turned on and off when the target values match can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired. Figure 70: FP Σ High–speed counter function – I/O allocation–1 X0 X2 A phase input Reset input Yn * On and off output X1 B phase input When using CH0 with two–phase input and reset input * The output turned on and off when the target values match can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired. Figure 71: FP Σ High–speed counter function – I/O allocation–2 FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 13 5.3.5 Instructions Used with High–speed Counter Function High–speed counter control instruction (F0) This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable. Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052. Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again. Operations that can be performed with this instruction – Counter software reset – Counting operation enable/disable – Hardware reset enable/disable – Clear controls from high–speed counter instructions F166 , F167 and F171 to F173 – Clear target value match interrupt Example: Performing a software reset X7 F0 MV, H  1 , DT90052 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ 1 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ 2 F0 MV, H  0 , DT90052 DF Figure 72: FP Σ Program of high–speed counter control instruction “F0” In the above program, the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 . The count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed. Elapsed value change and read instruction (F1) This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high–speed counter. Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90044. The elapsed value is stored as 32–bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045. Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value. Example 1: Changing the elapsed value. X7 DF F1 DMV, K3000, DT90044 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high–speed counter Figure 73: FP Σ Program (1) of elapsed value change and read instruction “F1” FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 14 Example 2: Reading the elapsed value X7 DF F1 DMV, DT90044, DT100 Read the elapsed value of the high–speed counter and co- pies it to DT100 and DT101 Figure 74: FP Σ Program (2) of elapsed value change and read instruction “F1” The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below. Control codes written with an F0(MV) instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193. High–speed counter control flag area of FP Σ Tip 15 12 11 8 Near home input 0: off 1: on Clear high–speed counter instruction 0: Continue 1: Clear Pulse output 0: Continue 1: Stop Hardware reset 0: Permit 1: Prohibit Count 0: Permit 1: Prohibit Software reset 0: No 1: Yes DT90052: Channel specification H0 to H3: CH0 to CH3 7 4 3 0 FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 15 Target value match on instruction (F166) Example 1: XA DF F166 HC1S, K0, K10000, Y7 If the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns on. Figure 75: FP Σ Program (1) of target value match on instruction “F166” Example 2: XB DF F166 HC1S, K2, K20000, Y6 If the elapsed value (DT90200 and DT90201) for channel 2 matches K20000, output Y6 turns on. Figure 76: FP Σ Program (2) of target value match on instruction “F166” Target value match off instruction (F167) Example 1: XC DF F167 HC1R, K1, K30000, Y4 If the elapsed value (DT90048 and DT90049) for channel 1 matches K30000, output Y4 turns off. Figure 77: FP Σ Program (1) of target value match off instruction “F167” Example 2: XD DF F167 HC1R, K3, K40000, Y5 If the elapsed value (DT90204 and DT90205) for channel 3 matches K40000, output Y5 turns off. Figure 78: FP Σ Program (2) of target value match off instruction “F167” FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 16 5.3.6 Sample Program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Y0 + – X0 X5 COM Encoder input Operation start Input terminal Output terminal Inverter operation Encoder Motor Operation/Stop Inverter COM Conveyor Wiring example Figure 79: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 1 (wiring) I/O No. Description X0 Encoder input X5 Operation start signal Y0 Inverter operation signal R100 Positioning operation running R101 Positioning operation start R102 Positioning done pulse R903A High–speed counter CH0 control flag Figure 80: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 1 (operation chart) Y0 Speed Number of pulse 5000 0 Operation chart I/O allocation FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 17 DF X5 R100 R903A R102 Positioning operations running R100 DF R100 R101 Positioning operations start R101 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 90044 F167 HC1R K 0 ,K 5000 ,Y 0 Sets high–speed counter CH0 DF/ R903A R102 R102 R100 T0 TMX 0, K 5 R101 Y0 S Resets elapsed value of high–speed counter CH0 Target value match off instruction Y0 goes off when elapsed value of high–speed counter CH0 reaches 5,000 pulses Set the inverter operation signal “Y0” Posotioning done pulse (0.5 s) 0.1 s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0.5 s timer Program When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops. Y0 goes off When elapsed value reaches 5,000 Figure 81: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 1 (program) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 18 Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Y0 Y1 + – X0 X5 COM COM Input terminal Output terminal Encoder Motor Operation/Stop Inverter Conveyor Wiring example Fast/Slow Encoder input Operation start Inverter operation Inverter high–speed Figure 82: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 2 (wiring) I/O No. Description X0 Encoder input X5 Operation start signal Y0 Inverter operation signal Y1 Inverter high–speed signal R100 Positioning operation running R101 Positioning operation start R102 Arrival at deceleration point R103 Positioning done pulse R900C Comparison instruction “<” flag R903A High–speed counter CH0 control flag Figure 83: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 2 (operation chart) Y0 5000 4500 Y1 0 Speed Number of pulse Operation chart I/O allocation FP Σ 5.3 High–speed Counter Function 5 - 19 Program When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor be- gins decelerating. When the elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops. R101 DF X5 R100 R100 R903A R103 DF R100 R101 DF/ R903A R103 R103 R100 T0 TMX 0, K 5 R101 Y0 S Y1 S R100 DF R102 Y1 R R100 R102 R900C F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 90044 F167 HC1R K 0 ,K 5000 ,Y 0 F61 DCMP K 4500 DT 90044 Positioning operations running Positioning operations start Resets elapsed value of high–speed counter CH0 Target value match off instruction Y0 goes off when elapsed value of high–speed counter CH0 reaches 5,000 pulses Set the inverter operation signal “Y0”. Set the inverter high–speed signal “Y1”. 32–bit data comparison instruction R900C turns on when the CH0 high–speed counter elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pulses. Speed reduction point reached Reset the inverter high–speed signal “Y1”. Positioning done pulse (0.5 s) Sets high–speed counter CH0 Y0 goes off When elapsed value reaches 5,000 0.1 s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0.5 s timer Figure 84: FP Σ High–speed counter function – sample program 2 (program) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 20 5.4 Pulse Output Function This section explains about the pulse output function of FP Σ . 5.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls The pulse output function enables positioning control by use in combination with a commercially available pulse–string input type motor driver. Provides trapezoidal (table–shaped) control with the exclusive instruction F171 (SPDH) for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed, maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and target value. The exclusive instruction F171 (SPDH) also enables automatic home return operation. JOG operation with the exclusive instruction F172 (PLSH) for pulse output while the execution condition (trigger) is in the on state. Setting the system register When using the pulse output function, set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to “Do not use high–speed counter.” FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 21 5.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method Y0 Y1 CCW pulse CW pulse Forward Reverse Direction of increas- ing elapsed value Direction of decreas- ing elapsed value CW/CCW output method This is a method in which control is carried out using two pulses, a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse. Figure 85: FP Σ Pulse output function – CW/CCW output method Y0 Y1 ON OFF Rotation direction [Sign] Pulse [Pulse] Forward Reverse Direction of increas- ing elapsed value Direction of decreas- ing elapsed value This is a method in which control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed, and on/off signals to specify the direction of rotatin. In this mode, forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction (Sign) signal is off. Pulse/Sign output method (Forward: off/Reverse: on) Figure 86: FP Σ Pulse output function – Pulse/sign output method 1 Y0 Y1 OFF ON Forward Reverse Rotation direction [Sign] Pulse [Pulse] Direction of increas- ing elapsed value Direction of decreas- ing elapsed value This is a method in which control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed, and on/off signals to specify the direction of rotatin. In this mode, forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction (Sign) signal is on. Pulse/Sign output method (Forward: on/Reverse: off) Figure 87: FP Σ Pulse output function – Pulse/sign output method 2 FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 22 5.4.3 I/O Allocation Double pulse input driver (CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method) Two output contact are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”. The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used. (See the table of specifications on page 5 - 6.) Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”. X2 X3 Y0 Home input Near home input CW output * Y1 CCW output Driver When using CH0 * X3 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input. Figure 88: FP Σ Pulse output function – I/O allocation when using CH0 (double pulse input) X5 X6 Y3 Home input Near home input CW output * Y4 CCW output Driver When using CH2 * X6 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input. Figure 89: FP Σ Pulse output function – I/O allocation when using CH2 (double pulse input) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 23 Single pulse input driver (pulse input and directional switching input method) One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output. The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by the channel used. (See the table of specifications on page 5 - 6.) Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the specified bit of special data register DT90052. Up to two driver systems can be connected. X2 X3 Y0 Home input Near home input Pulse output * Y1 Directional switching output Driver When using CH0 * X3 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input. Figure 90: FP Σ Pulse output function – I/O allocation when using CH0 (single pulse input) X5 X6 Y3 Home input Near home input Pulse output * Y4 Directional switching output Driver When using CH2 * X6 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input. Figure 91: FP Σ Pulse output function – I/O allocation when using CH2 (single pulse input) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 24 Notes Precautions when the Pulse and Sign type of driver is being used With some motor drivers, it takes some time for pulse input to be accepted after the directional output has gone on. (For detailed information, please contact the manufacturer of the motor driver.) As a result, when the FP Σ is used in the directional output mode, and a fast frequency has been specified for the initial speed, there may be times when pulses are skipped if pulse output starts instantaneously. If this happens, set the initial speed setting for the FP Σ to a slower frequency. Pulse output from the FP Σ starts from the off state when the FP Σ is booted, so more time leeway can be created by setting a slower frequency. Calculating the frequency Frequency F (Hz), duty (on width) D%, motor driver setup time Tm(s) F < (100 – D) ÷ (Tm × 100) Example: When the motor driver setup time is Tm = 100 μ s = 100 x 10 –6 (s), the frequency F must be set to 5,000 Hz or less when the duty is 50% (1/2). If the duty is 25% (1/4), the frequency F must be set to 7,500 Hz or less. FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 25 5.4.4 Control Mode Incremental <relative value control> Outputs the pulses set with the target value. Target value Selected mode CW/CCW PLS and SIGN Forward off/Reverse on PLS and SIGN Forward on/Reverse off Elapsed value of high–speed counter Positive Pulse output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction output is on Increment Negative Pulse output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is on Pulse output when direction output is off Decrement Absolute <absolute value control> Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value. Target value Selected mode CW/CCW PLS and SIGN Forward off/Reverse on PLS and SIGN Forward on/Reverse off Elapsed value of high–speed counter Target value greater than current value Pulse output from CW Pulse output when direction output is off Pulse output when direction output is on Increment Target value less than current value Pulse output from CCW Pulse output when direction output is on Pulse output when direction output is off Decrement Home return Until the home input (X2 or X5) is entered by executing F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output. To decelerate the movement when near the home, set the bit corresponding to the special data register DT90052 to off → on → off with the near home input. The differential counter clear output can be output when the return to the home position has been completed. JOG operation Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the on state. The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction. FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 26 5.4.5 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function Positioning control instruction (F171) (trapezoidal control) Automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table. Generates a pulse from output Y0 at an initial speed of 500Hz, a maximum speed of 5,000Hz, an acceleration/deceleration time of 200ms, and a movement amount of 10,000 pulses. X8 DF F1 DMV, H1100, DT100 F1 DMV, K500, DT102 F1 DMV, K5000, DT104 F1 DMV, K200, DT106 F1 DMV, K10000, DT108 F1 DMV, K0, DT110 F171 SPDH, DT100, K0 Figure 92: FP Σ Program of positioning control instruction “F171” When the program is run, the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below. Positioning data table DT100 DT101 Control code * 1 :H 1100 DT102 DT103 Initial speed * 2 :500 Hz DT104 DT105 Maximum speed * 2 :5,000 Hz DT106 DT107 Acceleration/deceleration time * 3 :200 ms DT108 DT109 Target value * 4 :10,000 pulses DT110 DT111 Pulse stop :K0 Pulse output diagram 200 ms 200 ms 5,000 Hz 500 Hz 10,000 pulses 0 Hz Figure 93: FP Σ Pulse output diagram of “F171” instruction FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 27 Operation mode and output type 00: Incremental CW/CCW 02: Incremental PLS and SIGN (forward off / reverse on) 03: Incremental PLS and SIGN (forward on / reverse off) 10: Absolute CW/CCW 12: Absolute PLS and SIGN (forward off / reverse on) 13: Absolute PLS and SIGN (forward on / reverse off) H         0: Fixed Duty (on width) 0: Duty 1/2 (50%) 1: Duty 1/4 (25%) Frequency range ( * 2) 0: 1.5 Hz to 9.8 kHz 1: 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2: 191 Hz to 100 kHz ( * 1): Control code ( * 2): Frequency (Hz) “K constant” 1.5 Hz to 9.8 KHz [K1 to K9800 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 9.8 kHz approximately –1 kHz) 48 Hz to 100 KHz [K48 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –3 kHz) 191 Hz to 100 KHz [K191 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –0.8 kHz) * Set “K1” to specify 1.5 Hz.. ( * 3): Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) “K constant” K30 to K32767 ( *4 ): Target value “K constant” K–2147483648 to K2147483647 Figure 94: FP Σ Control code of “F171” instruction FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 28 Pulse output instruction (F172) (JOG operation) This instruction is for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition (trigger) turns on. While XB is in the on state, a pulse of 300Hz is output from Y0. XB F172 PLSH, DT300, K0 F1 DMV, H1110, DT300 F1 DMV, K300, DT302 Figure 95: FP Σ Program of pulse output instruction “F172” When the program is run, the data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below. Data table DT300 DT301 Control code * 1 :H 1110 DT302 DT303 Frequency * 2 :300 Hz on off XB (JOG command) 300 Hz 0 Hz Y0 (Pulse) Pulse output diagram Figure 96: FP Σ Pulse output diagram of “F172” instruction FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 29 0: Fixed Duty (on width) 0: Duty 1/2 (50%) 1: Duty 1/4 (25%) Frequency range ( * 2) 0: 1.5 Hz to 9.8 kHz 1: 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2: 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operating mode and output type 00: No counting CW 01: No counting CCW 10: Incremental counting CW 12: Incremental counting Directional output off 13: Incremental counting Directional output on 21: Decremental counting CCW 22: Decremental counting Directional output off 23: Decremental counting Directional output on H         ( * 1): Control code ( * 2): Frequency (Hz) “K constant” 1.5 Hz to 9.8 kHz [K1 to K9800 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 9.8 kHz approximately –1 kHz) 48 Hz to 100 kHz [K48 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –3 kHz) 191 Hz to 100 kHz [K191 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –0.8 kHz) * Set “K1” to specify 1.5 Hz. During execution of an instruction, if a value is written for the frequency area that is outside of the allowable range, the frequency will be corrected to the minimum or maximum value for the pertinent frequency range before being output. The data that was written will not be corrected, however. Figure 97: FP Σ Control code of “F172” instruction FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 30 Positioning control instruction (F171) (home return) Performs home return according to the specified data table. Pulses are output from Y1 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial speed of 100 Hz, a maximum speed of 2,000 Hz, and an acceleration/deceleration time of 150 ms. XA DF F1 DMV, H1121, DT200 F1 DMV, K100, DT202 F1 DMV, K2000, DT204 F1 DMV, K150, DT206 F1 DMV, K0, DT208 F171 SPDH, DT200, K0 Figure 98: FP Σ Program of positioning control instruction “F171” When the program is run, the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below. Positioning data table DT200 DT201 Control code * 1 :H 1121 DT202 DT203 Initial speed * 2 :100 Hz DT204 DT205 Maximum speed * 2 :2000 Hz DT206 DT207 Acceleration/deceleration time * 3 :150 ms DT208 DT209 Deviation counter clear signal * 4 :Not used 2000 Hz XA:on Pulse output diagram (when near home input is not used) 150 ms 100 Hz 0 Hz Home sensor:on XA:on Pulse output diagram (when near home input is used) Near home sensor:on Home sensor:on 2000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz 150 ms 150 ms Figure 99: FP Σ Pulse output diagram of “F171” instruction FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 31 Operation mode and output type 20: Type I home return CW 21: Type I home return CCW 22: Type I home return Direction output off 23: Type I home return Direction output on 24: Type I home return CW and deviation counter reset 25: Type I home return CCW and deviation counter reset 26: Type I home return Direction output off and deviation counter reset 27: Type I home return Direction output on and deviation counter reset 30: Type II home return CW 31: Type II home return CCW 32: Type II home return Direction output off 33: Type II home return Direction output on 34: Type II home return CW and deviation counter reset 35: Type II home return CCW and deviation counter reset 36: Type II home return Direction output off and deviation counter reset 37: Type II home return Direction output on and deviation counter reset 0: Fixed Duty (on width) 0: Duty 1/2 (50%) 1: Duty 1/4 (25%) Frequency range ( * 2) 0: 1.5 Hz to 9.8 kHz 1: 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2: 191 Hz to 100 kHz H         ( * 1): Control code ( * 2): Frequency (Hz) “K constant” 1.5 Hz to 9.8 KHz [K1 to K9800 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 9.8 kHz approximately –1 kHz) 48 Hz to 100 KHz [K48 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –3 kHz) 191 Hz to 100 KHz [K191 to K100000 (units: Hz)] (Maximum error near 100 kHz approximately –0.8 kHz) * Set “K1” to specify 1.5 Hz.. ( * 3): Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) “K constant” K30 to K32767 ( * 4): Deviation counter clear signal (ms) “K constant” 0.5 ms to 100 ms [K0 to K100] Set value and error (0.5 ms or less) Specify “K0” when not using or when specifying 0.5 ms. If a value is written that exceeds the specified range of the deviation counter clear signal, it will be revised to a value within the range. Figure 100: FP Σ Control code of “F171” instruction FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 32 Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP Σ , a Type I home re- turn and a Type II home return. Type I home return The home return input is effective regardless of whether or not there is near home input, whether deceleration is taking place, or whether deceleration has been com- pleted. In this mode, near home input is not used. Tip 0Hz Speed Max. speed Initial speed Type II home return In this mode, the home return input is effective only after deceleration based on the near home input has been completed. Home input: on 0Hz Speed Max. speed Initial speed Home input: on Near home input: on Home input is effective at any timing. 0Hz Speed Max. speed Initial speed Home input: on Near home input: on 0Hz Speed Max. speed Initial speed Home input: on Near home input: on Home return input effective only during deceleration. When near home input is not used When near home input is used When home input is input while the near home input is decelerating Figure 101: FP Σ Home return operation modes FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 33 Pulse output control instruction (F0) This instruction is used for resetting the built–in high–speed counter, stopping the pulse outputs, and setting and resetting the near home input. Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with the special data register DT90052. Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again. Example 1: Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration. In the program, the near home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations. F0 MV, H  0 , DT90052 F0 MV, H 10 , DT90052 X3 DF ..... 1 ..... 2 Figure 102: FP Σ Program 1 of pulse output control instruction “F0” Example 2: Performing a forced stop of the pulse output. X7 DF F0 MV, H  8 , DT90052 F0 MV, H  0 , DT90052 Figure 103: FP Σ Program 2 of pulse output control instruction “F0” Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1) This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built–in high–speed counter. Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction together with the special data register DT90044. The elapsed value is stored as 32–bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045. Use only this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value. Example 1: Writing the elasped value X7 DF F1 DMV, K3000, DT90044 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high–speed counter. Figure 104: FP Σ Program 1 of elapsed value write and read instruction “F1” Example 2: Reading the elapsed value X8 DF F1 DMV, DT90044, DT100 Reads the elapsed value of the high–speed counter to DT100 and DT101. Figure 105: FP Σ Program 2 of elapsed value write and read instruction “F1” FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 34 The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown below. Control codes written with an F0(MV) instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193. High–speed counter control flag area of FP Σ Tip 15 12 11 8 Near home input 0: off 1: on High–speed counter instruction 0: Continue 1: Clear Pulse output 0: Continue 1: Stop Hardware reset 0: Permit 1: Prohibit Count 0: Permit 1: Prohibit Software reset 0: No 1: Yes DT90052: Channel specification H0 to H3: CH0 to CH3 7 4 3 0 For information on the special data register for high–speed counter function and pulse output function, see pages 5 - 5 and 5 - 6. FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 35 5.4.6 Sample Program for Positioning Control Wiring example X2 X8 X9 XA X3 XB XC XD COM Y0 Y1 + – Input terminal Home sensor Positioning start (+) Home return start Near home sensor JOG start (+) JOG start (–) Overrun Positioning start (–) Output terminal Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW COM Power supply Stepping motor driver (Note) CW input COM CCW input Stepping motor (– side) (+ side) Moving table b contact a contact a contact b contact 24 V DC Figure 106: FP Σ Pulse output function – sample program (wiring) Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 k Ω 1/4 W resister. Table of I/O allocation I/O No. Description I/O No. Description X2 Home sensor input XD Overrnning signal X3 Near home sensor input Y0 Pulse output CW X8 Positioning start signal (+) Y1 Pulse output CCW X9 Positioning start signal (–) R10 Positioning in progress XA Home return start signal R11 Positioning operation start XB JOG start signal (+) R12 Positioning done pulse XC JOG start signal (–) R903A High–speed counter control flag for CH0 FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 36 Relative value positioning operation (plus direction) When X8 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output “Y0” of specified channel “CH0”. Y0 0 V (24 V DC) Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Y1 Motor driver (– side) Motor (+ side) 10000 pulses X8 Start input (+) Figure 107: FP Σ Sample program – relative value positioning operation (+ direction) R903A R10 R12 DF X8 R10 R903A R12 T0 R12 DF/ R10 DF R10 R11 R11 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start F1 DMV H 1100 ,DT 100 F171 SPDH DT 100 ,K 0 F1 DMV K 500 ,DT 102 F1 DMV K 5000 ,DT 104 F1 DMV K 200 ,DT 106 F1 DMV K 10000 ,DT 108 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 110 TMX 0, K 10 Program Positioning data table Pulse output instruction (table–shaped control) The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CH0. The data table headed by DT100 is used. Pulses are output from CH0. Positioning done pulse (1 second) 0.1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1–second timer H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW * Control code DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT111 Control code * : H 1100 Initial speed: 500 Hz Maximum speed: 5,000 Hz Acceleration time: 200 msec Target value (Movement amount) :10,000 pulses Pulse stop 00 Figure 108: FP Σ Sample program – relative value positioning operation (program) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 37 Pulse output diagram 200 ms 200 ms 5,000 Hz 500 Hz 10,000 pulses 0 Hz Figure 109: FP Σ Sample program – pulse output diagram FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 38 Relative value positioning operation (minus direction) When X9 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output “Y1” of specified channel CH0. Y1 Y0 0 V (24 V DC) X9 Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver (– side) Motor (+ side) 8000 pulses Start input (–) Figure 110: FP Σ Sample program – relative value positioning operation (– direction) R903A R20 R22 DF X9 R20 R903A R22 T0 R22 DF/ R20 DF R20 R21 R21 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start F1 DMV H 1100 ,DT 100 F171 SPDH DT 100 ,K 0 F1 DMV K 1000 ,DT 102 F1 DMV K 6000 ,DT 104 F1 DMV K 300 ,DT 106 F1 DMV K –8000 ,DT 108 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 110 TMX 0, K 10 Program Positioning data table Pulse output instruction (table–shaped control) The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CH0. The data table headed by DT100 is used. Pulses are output from CH0. Positioning done pulse (1 second) 0.1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1–second timer H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW * Control code DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT111 Control code * : H 1100 Initial speed: 1,000 Hz Maximum speed: 6,000 Hz Acceleration time: 300 msec Target value (Movement amount) :–8,000 pulses Pulse stop 00 Figure 111: FP Σ Sample program – relative value positioning operation (program) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 39 Pulse output diagram 300 ms 300 ms 6,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 8,000 pulses 0 Hz Figure 112: FP Σ Sample program – pulse output diagram FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 40 Absolute value positioning operation When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output “Y0” or CCW output “Y1” of specified channel CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than “22,000”, the pulses are output from Y1, and if the value is smaller than “22,000”, the pulses are output from Y2. Y1 Y0 0 V (24 V DC) X8 (10,000) Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver (– side) Motor (+ side) Start input 22,000 (30,000) Regardless of the current value, its movement is towards position “22,000.” Figure 113: FP Σ Sample program – absolute value positioning operation FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 41 R903A R30 R32 DF X8 R30 R903A R32 T0 R32 DF/ R30 DF R30 R31 R31 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start F1 DMV H 1110 ,DT 100 F171 SPDH DT 100 ,K 0 F1 DMV K 200 ,DT 102 F1 DMV K 4000 ,DT 104 F1 DMV K 250 ,DT 106 F1 DMV K 22000 ,DT 108 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 110 TMX 0, K 10 Program Positioning data table Pulse output instruction (table–shaped control) The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CH0. The data table headed by DT100 is used. Pulses are output from CH0. Positioning done pulse (1 second) 0.1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1–second timer H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Absolute CW and CCW * Control code DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT111 Control code * : H 1110 Initial speed: 200 Hz Maximum speed: 4,000 Hz Acceleration time: 250 msec Target value (Movement amount) :22,000 pulses Pulse stop 10 Figure 114: FP Σ Sample program – absolute value positioning operation (program) Pulse output diagram 250 ms 250 ms 4,000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz Figure 115: FP Σ Sample program – pulse output diagram FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 42 Home return operation (minus direction) When XA turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output “Y1” of specified channel “CH0” and the return to home begins. When X3 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X2 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value area “DT90044 and DT90045” are cleared to 0. Y1 Y0 0 V (24 V DC) XA X2 X3 X2 X3 Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver (– side) Motor (+ side) Home return start Home input Near home input Near home sensor Home sensor Figure 116: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (– direction) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 43 R903A R40 R42 DF XA R40 R903A R42 T0 R42 DF/ R40 DF R40 R41 R41 X3 DF The data table headed by DT200 is used. Pulses are output from CH0. F1 DMV H 1121 ,DT 200 F1 DMV K 100 ,DT 202 F1 DMV K 2000 ,DT 204 F1 DMV K 150 ,DT 206 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 208 F171 SPDH DT 200 ,K 0 TMX 0, K 10 F0 MV H 10 ,DT 90052 F0 MV H 0 ,DT 90052 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start Positioning data table DT200 DT201 DT202 DT203 DT204 DT205 DT206 DT207 DT208 DT209 Control code * : H 1121 Initial speed: 100 Hz Maximum speed: 2,000 Hz Acceleration time: 150 msec Deviation counter clear output: Not used H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CCW * Control code Pulse output instruction (table–shaped control) The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CH0. Positioning done pulse (1 s) 0.1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1–second timer Near home deceleration start Program 21 Figure 117: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (program) XA:on Pulse output diagram 150 ms 150 ms 2,000 Hz 100 Hz 0 Hz Near home sensor X3:on Home sensor X2:on Figure 118: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (pulse output diagram) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 44 Home return operation (plus direction) When XA turns on, a pulse is output from CW output “Y0” of specified channel “CH0” and the return to home begins. When X3 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X2 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value area “DT90044 and DT90045” are cleared to 0. Y1 XA X2 X3 X3 X2 Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor driver (– side) Motor (+ side) Home return start Home input Near home input Home sensor Near home sensor Y0 0 V (24 V DC) Figure 119: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (+ direction) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 45 R903A R50 R52 DF XA R50 R903A R52 T0 R52 DF/ R50 DF R50 R51 R51 X3 DF The data table headed by DT200 is used. Pulses are output from CH0. F1 DMV H 1120 ,DT 200 F1 DMV K 120 ,DT 202 F1 DMV K 1000 ,DT 204 F1 DMV K 100 ,DT 206 F1 DMV K 0 ,DT 208 F171 SPDH DT 200 ,K 0 TMX 0, K 10 F0 MV H 10 ,DT 90052 F0 MV H 0 ,DT 90052 Positioning operation running Positioning operation start Positioning data table DT200 DT201 DT202 DT203 DT204 DT205 DT206 DT207 DT208 DT209 Control code * : H 1120 Initial speed: 120 Hz Maximum speed: 1,000 Hz Acceleration time: 100 msec Deviation counter clear output: Not used H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CW * Control code Pulse output instruction (table–shaped control) The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CH0. Positioning done pulse (1 s) 0.1 s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1–second timer Near home deceleration start Program 20 Figure 120: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (program) XA:on Pulse output diagram 100 ms 100 ms 1,000 Hz 120 Hz 0 Hz Near home sensor X3:on Home sensor X2:on Figure 121: FP Σ Sample program – home return operation (pulse output diagram) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 46 JOG operation (plus direction) While X8 is in the on state, a pulse is output from CW output “Y0” of specified channel “CH0”. XB F1 DMV H 1110 ,DT 300 F1 DMV K 300 ,DT 302 F172 PLSH DT 300 ,K 0 DT300 DT301 DT302 DT303 Control code * : H 1110 Frequency (speed): 300 Hz The data table headed by DT300 is used. Data table H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental counting CW * Control code Pulse output instruction (JOG operation) The data table headed by DT300 is used and pulses are output from CH0. Program Pulses are output from CH0. 00 Figure 122: FP Σ Sample program – JOG operation (+ direction) (program) on off XB (JOG command) 300Hz 0Hz Y0 (Pulse) (– side) Motor (+ side) Pulse output diagram Figure 123: FP Σ Sample program – JOG operation (pulse output diagram) JOG operation (minus direction) While XC is in the on state, a pulse is output from CCW output “Y1” of specified channel “CH0”. XC F1 DMV H 1121 ,DT 310 F1 DMV K 300 ,DT 312 F172 PLSH DT 310 ,K 0 DT310 DT311 DT312 DT313 Control code * : H 1121 Frequency (speed): 300 Hz Data table H11 Duty 1/4 (25%) 48 Hz to 100 kHz Decremental counting CCW * Control code Pulse output instruction (JOG operation) The data table headed by DT310 is used and pulses are output from CH0. Program The data table headed by DT310 is used Pulses are output from CH0. 21 Figure 124: FP Σ Sample program – JOG operation (– diagram) (program) on off XC (JOG command) 300Hz 0Hz Y1 (Pulse) (– side) Motor (+ side) Pulse output diagram Figure 125: FP Σ Sample program – JOG operation (pulse output diagram) FP Σ 5.4 Pulse Output Function 5 - 47 Emergency stop (over limit) If XD turns off while a pulse is being output from Y0, the output of the pulse is stopped. XD DF/ F0 MV H 8 ,DT 90052 F0 MV H 0 ,DT 90052 Pulse output control clear Program Figure 126: FP Σ Sample program – emergency stop (program) FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 48 5.5 PWM Output Function This section explains about the PWM output function of FP Σ . 5.5.1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of specified duty ratio is obtained. Setting the system register When using the PWM output function, set the channels “CH0 and CH2” corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to “Do not use high–speed counter.” 5.5.2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function PWM output instruction (F173) While X6 is in the on state, a pulse with a period of 502.5ms and duty ratio of 50% is output from Y0 of specified channel “CH2”. X6 F0 MV, K1, DT100 F0 MV, K500, DT101 F173 PWMH, DT100, K0 Figure 127: FP Σ PWM output instruction “F173” (program) When the program is run, the data table will be as shown below. Data table DT100 Control code * 1 :K 1 DT101 Duty * 2 :50% FP Σ 5.5 PWM Output Function 5 - 49 * 1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant. Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K0 1.5 666.7 K20 15.6 k 0.06 K1 2.0 502.5 K21 20.8 k 0.05 K2 4.1 245.7 K22 25.0 k 0.04 K3 6.1 163.9 K23 31.3 k 0.03 K4 8.1 122.9 K24 41.7 k 0.02 K5 9.8 102.4 K6 19.5 51.2 K7 48.8 20.5 K8 97.7 10.2 K9 201.6 5.0 K10 403.2 2.5 K11 500.0 2.0 K12 694.4 1.4 K13 1.0 k 1.0 K14 1.3 k 0.8 K15 1.6 k 0.6 K16 2.1 k 0.5 K17 3.1 k 0.3 K18 6.3 k 0.2 K19 12.5 k 0.1 * 2: Specification of duty (specify using K constant) If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%). If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%). Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits below the decimal point are rounded off). Note If a value outside the specified range is written for the duty area while the instruction is being executed, the frequency that is output will be uncorrected. Written data is not corrected, however. FP Σ High–speed Counter and Pulse Output Functions 5 - 50 Chapter 6 Communication Cassette 6.1 Communication Functions of FP Σ 6 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Functions of Communication Cassette 6 - 3 . . . . . 6.2 Communication Cassette 6 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Type of Communication Cassette 6 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports 6 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Communication Specifications of Communication Cassette 6 - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Attachment of Communication Cassette 6 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Attachment Procedure 6 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Wiring of Communication Cassette 6 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Wiring the Connector with the Communication Cassette 6 - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Tool for Tightening Communication Connector Terminal Block 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Wiring Method 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Cautions Regarding Wiring 6 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 2 FP Σ 6.1 Communication Functions of FP Σ 6 - 3 6.1 Communication Functions of FP Σ This section explains about the communication functions and type of the optional communication cassette. 6.1.1 Functions of Communication Cassette There are three types of communication functions made possible by the FP Σ communication cassette, as described below. Computer link The computer link is used to carry out communication with a computer connected to the PLC that has a transmission right. Instructions (command messages) are output to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages) based on the received instructions. A MEWNET exclusive protocol called “MEWTOCOL–COM” is used to exchange data between the computer and PLC. Two communication methods are available, 1:1 and 1:N. A network using the 1:N connection is called a C–NET. The PLC sends back responses automatically in reply to commands from the computer, so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication. Computer Command message Response message FP Σ Figure 128: FP Σ Computer link function Applicable communication cassette For 1:1 communication 1–channel RS232C type (Part No. FPG–COM1) . . . . 2–channel RS232C type (Part No. FPG–COM2) For 1:N communication 1–channel RS485 type (Part No. FPG–COM3) . . . FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 4 General–purpose serial communication General–purpose serial communication enables data to be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM. port and an external device such as a bar code reader. Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP Σ , while reading and writing of data from an external device connected to the COM. port is handled through the FP Σ data registers. Data transmission using F159(MTRN) instruction Data received in reception buffer Received data Data register (DT) Transmitted data Data is sent to and received from external devices through the data registers. FP Σ Image checker Bar code reader Figure 129: FP Σ General–purpose serial communication function Applicable communication cassette For 1:1 communication 1–channel RS232C type (Part No. FPG–COM1) . . . . 2–channel RS232C type (Part No. FPG–COM2) For 1:N communication 1–channel RS485 type (Part No. FPG–COM3) . . . FP Σ 6.1 Communication Functions of FP Σ 6 - 5 PLC link Data is shared with PLCs connected through the MEWNET, using dedicated internal relays “Link relays (L)” and data registers “Link registers (LD)”. When using link relays, if the link relay contact for one PLC goes on, the same link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to the network. With link registers, if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC, the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network. With a PLC link, the status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC are fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and all of the units are booted at the same timing. Link register If a constant of 100 is written to LD0 of the master station (No. 1), the contents of LD0 in the other station (No. 2) are also changed to a constant of 100. Link relay When the link relay “L0” of the master station (No. 1) is turned on, that signal is converted by the ladder programs of the other stations, and the Y0 of the other stations are output. FP Σ FP Σ FP Σ FP Σ No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 R0 R0 L0 L0 Y0 L0 Y0 Y0 F0, MV, K100, LD0 L0 LD 0 100 100 100 100 LD 0 LD 0 LD 0 No. 1 Link register No. 2 Link register No. 3 Link register No. 4 Link register RS485 Figure 130: FP Σ PLC link function Applicable communication cassette For 1:N communication 1–channel RS485 type (Part No. FPG–COM3) . . . FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 6 6.2 Communication Cassette This section explains about the optional communication cassette for FP Σ . 6.2.1 Type of Communication Cassette The communication cassette contains the following three types, which can be selected based on the application involved. 1–channel RS232C type (Part No. : FPG–COM1) This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. Abbreviation Name Signal direction SD Transmitted data Unit → External device RD Received data Unit ← External device RS Request to Send Unit → External device CS Clear to Send Unit ← External device SG Signal Ground — Figure 131: FP Σ 1–channel RS232C type communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type (Part No. : FPG–COM2) This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communication with two external devices is possible. Abbreviation Name Signal direction S1 Transmitted data 1 Unit → External device R1 Received data 1 Unit ← External device S2 Transmitted data 2 Unit → External device R2 Received data 2 Unit ← External device SG Signal Ground — Figure 132: FP Σ 2–channel RS232C type communication cassette FP Σ SD RD RS CS SG Terminal layout S1 R1 SG S2 R2 SG Terminal layout FP Σ FP Σ 6.2 Communication Cassette 6 - 7 1–channel RS485 type (Part No. : FPG–COM3) This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a two–wire RS485 port. It supports 1:N computer link (C–NET), general–purpose serial communication, and a PLC link. Abbreviation Name Signal direction + Transmission line (+) — – Transmission line (–) — + Transmission line (+) — – Transmission line (–) — E Terminal station setting — Figure 133: FP Σ 1–channel RS485 type communication cassette 6.2.2 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports The tool port provided as a standard feature of the FP Σ is treated as the COM. 0 port. The ports in which the communication cassettes are installed are treated as the COM. 1 port and COM. 2 port. The principle applications of the various ports are as described below. Port name When using only the FP Σ contorl unit When the 1–channel RS232C type has been added When the 2–channel RS232C type has been added When the 1–channel RS485 type has been added COM. 0 port Tool port Computer link Tool port Computer link Tool port Computer link Tool port Computer link COM. 1 port — Computer link General–purpose serial communication Computer link General–purpose serial communication C–NET General–purpose serial communication PLC link COM. 2 port — — Computer link General–purpose serial communication — Notes Communication using MEWTOCOL–COM is possible with ports and tool ports for which “Computer link” is noted above. With MEWTOCOL–COM, the same commands are supported on all three channels, and frames of up to 2,048 bytes (header <) are supported. General–purpose serial communication is possible only with the COM. 1 port and COM. 2 port. Terminal layout FP Σ + – E + – FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 8 6.2.3 Communication Specifications of Communication Cassette Serial communication specifications (1:1 communication) ( * Note 1) Item Specification Communication method Half–duplex communication Synchronous method Start–stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance (Total length) 3m/9.84 ft. Transmission speed (Baud rate) 9600 bits/s to 115.2 k bits/s ( * Note 2) Transmission code ASCII Transmission data format Stop bit: 1–bit/2–bit, Parity: None/Even/Odd Data length (Character bits): 7–bit/8–bit ( * Note 2) Interface Conforming to RS232C (Connection using terminal block) Notes 1) The RS232C type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the serial communication function (1:1 communication). 2) The transmission speed (baud rate) and transmission format are specified using the system registers. Serial communication specifications (1:N communication) ( * Note 1) Item Specification Communication method Two–wire half–duplex communication Synchronous method Start–stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission speed (Baud rate) 9600 bits/s to 115.2 k bits/s ( * Note 2) Transmission code ASCII Transmission data format Stop bit: 1–bit/2–bit, Parity: None/Even/Odd Data length (Character bits): 7–bit/8–bit ( * Note 2) Number of unit (station) Max. 32 units (stations) Interface Conforming to RS485 (Connection using terminal block) Notes 1) The RS485 type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the serial communication function (1:N communication). 2) The transmission speed (baud rate) and transmission format are specified using the system registers. 3) Unit (Station) numbers are specified using the system registers. Up to 31 units (stations) can be specified using the switches. FP Σ 6.2 Communication Cassette 6 - 9 PLC link function specifications ( * Note 1) Item Specification Communication method Token bus Transmission method Floating master Transmission line Twisted pair cable Transmission distance (Total length) 800 m/2,625 ft. Transmission speed (Baud rate) 115.2 kbps Number of units (stations) Max. 16 units (stations) ( * Note 2) PLC link capacity Link relay: 1,024 points, Link register: 128 words Interface Conforming to RS485 (Connection using terminal block) Notes 1) The RS485 type of communication cassette is necessary in order to use the PLC link function. 2) Unit (Station) numbers are specified using the switches or the system registers. FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 10 6.3 Attachment of Communication Cassette This section explains about the attachment procedure of optional communication cassette. 6.3.1 Attachment Procedure 1. Insert a screwdriver under the cover to remove it. Figure 134: FP Σ Communication cassette attachment procedure 1 2. Install the communication cassette. Communication cassette Figure 135: FP Σ Communication cassette attachment procedure 2 3. Plug in the communication connector. Figure 136: FP Σ Communication cassette attachment procedure 3 Note Turn off the power supply to the control unit before installing the communication cassette. FP Σ 6.4 Wiring of Communication Cassette 6 - 11 6.4 Wiring of Communication Cassette This section explains about the wiring of optional communication cassette. 6.4.1 Wiring the Connector with the Communication Cassette The communication connector (provided with the communication cassette) has a screw–type terminal block. Use the following for wiring. Figure 137: FP Σ Communication connector Accessory communication connector The communication connector made by Phoenix Contact Co. should be used. Model No. of Phoenix Contact Co. Number of pin Model No. Product No. 5 pins MC1,5/5–ST–3,5 1840396 Suitable wire (Twisted wire) Size Cross–sectional area AWG#28 to 16 0.08 mm 2 to 1.25 mm 2 Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used, the following models are marketed by Phoenix Contact Co. Manufacturer Cross-sectional area Size Product number 0.25 mm 2 AWG#24 AI 0,25–6 YE Phoenix 0.50 mm 2 AWG#20 AI 0,50–6 WH Phoenix Contact Co. 0.75 mm 2 AWG#18 AI 0,75–6 GY 1.00 mm 2 AWG#18 AI 1–6 RD Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Model No. of Phoenix Contact Co. Manufacturer Model No. Product No. Phoenix Contact Co. CRIMPFOX UD6 12 04 43 6 FP Σ Communication Cassette 6 - 12 6.4.2 Tool for Tightening Communication Connector Terminal Block When tightening the terminals of the communication connector, use a screwdriver “Phoenix Contact Co., Product No. 1205037, blade size of 0.4 2.5, model No. SZS 0,4 x 2,5” or screwdriver “Part No. AFP0806”. The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N ⋅ m or less. 6.4.3 Wiring Method Procedure: 1. Remove a portion “7 mm/0.276 in.” of the wire’s insulation. 7 mm Figure 138: FP Σ Communication connector wiring method 1 2. Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block, and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. Figure 139: FP Σ Communication connector wiring method 2 6.4.4 Cautions Regarding Wiring The following items should be observed, taking care not to cut or disconnect the wiring. – When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire. – Do not twist the wires to connect them. – Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration. – After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire. – In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire closes upon counter-clockwise rotation, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the wire. CORRECT (Clockwise) INCORRECT (Counter clockwise) Figure 140: Cautions regarding wiring Chapter 7 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Overview of Function 7 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Explanation of Operation when Using a Computer Link 7 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 Format of Command and Response 7 - 5 . . . . . . . 7.1.4 Types of Commands that Can Be Used 7 - 8 . . . . 7.1.5 Setting the Communication Parameters when Using a Computer Link 7 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.6 Restriction 7 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Connection Example with External Device 7 - 11 . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with computer) 7 - 11 . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with programmable display “GT10”) 7 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Computer Link (1:N communication) 7 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Overview of 1:N Communication 7 - 18 . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Communication Cassette Used for 1:N Communication 7 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3 Settings of System Register and Unit No. 7 - 19 . . 7.3.4 Connection with External Device 7 - 22 . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 2 FP Σ 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 3 7.1 Computer Link This section contains overview of computer link function. 7.1.1 Overview of Function Computer Command message Response message FP Σ With a computer link, first an instruction (command) is sent from the computer to the PLC, and then the PLC sends a reply (response) back to the computer. Figure 141: FP Σ Overview of computer link function What is the computer link? A computer link is a function that carries out communication between a computer and PLC, making it possible to monitor and control the PLC operating status from a computer. Conversation is carried out between the two by instructions (commands) being sent from the computer to the PLC, and the PLC replying (sending response messages) back to the computer. A MEWNET exclusive protocol called “MEWTOCOL–COM” is used to exchange data between the computer and PLC. The communication speed and transmission format are specified using system registers No. 413 (COM. 1 port) and No. 414 (COM. 2 port). Program for computer link To use a computer link, a program should be created that enables command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side. No communication program is required on the PLC side. Programs for the computer side should be written in BASIC or C language, based on the MEWTOCOL–COM format. MEWTOCOL–COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation. FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 4 7.1.2 Explanation of Operation when Using a Computer Link Command and Response Instructions pertaining to the PLC are called “commands”. These should be issued by the computer, to the PLC. Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called “responses”. When the PLC receives a command, it processes the command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a response back to the computer. The computer uses the response to confirm the results of the command being executed. MEWTOCOL–COM sketch Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL– COM communication procedures. Data is sent in ASCII format. The computer has the first right of transmission. The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and PLC each time a message is sent. 4 The unit number of the PLC that sent the response 5 Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out suc- cessfully 6 The type of command processed 7 If the command was used to read data, the data that was read 8 If an error occurred and the com- mand could not be processed suc- cessfully, the content of the error Command messages sent from the PLC should contain the follow- ing content: Command messages should contain the following content when sent: 1 The unit number of the PLC to which the command is being sent 2 The type of command 3 Any settings and data re- quired in order to execute the command Computer Start code Command message Destina- tion 1 Text 2 3 Check code End code Transmission program Reception processing program The command and data are sent to the PLC with the specified unit number. A response is returned, and proc- essing is carried out based on the content of the response, such as retrieving any data that was sent. Start code Source 4 Text 5 6 7 8 Check code End code Response message FP Σ Figure 142: FP Σ MEWTOCOL–COM FP Σ 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 5 7.1.3 Format of Command and Response Command message Items necessary for commands should be noted in the text segment, and the unit number specified before sending the command. % or < 0 1 # R C S R 0 0 0 1 C R 1 Start code 2 Unit No. of destination (01 to 32, Decimal) 3 Text (Content is specified based on type of command) 4 Check code (BCC, Hexadecimal) 5 End code (Two– digit) Target that reads the value (internal relay R1) Specified item (specifies that only 1 point should be read) Command name (e.g. Read contact area) Command code (Indicates that this is a command) (One– digit) Figure 143: FP Σ Command message (format) 1 Start code (Header) Commands must always have a “%” (ASCII code: H25) or a “<” (ASCII code: H3C) at the beginning of a message. 2 Unit No. Any PLC connected to the C–NET has a unit number specified for it. The unit number of the PLC to which the command is being sent should be specified. When using 1:1 communication, “01” should be specified. 3 Text The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper–case characters, following the fixed formula for that particular command. % 0 1 # R C S X 0 0 0 1 C R 1 D Specification and data to be written Command name Command code [#] (ASCII code: H23) Figure 144: FP Σ Command message (text) 4 Check code This is the BCC (block check code) used to detect errors using horizontal parity. It should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the start code to the last text character. The BCC starts from the start code and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with character text. It is normally part of the calculation program, and is created automatically. The parity check can be skipped by entering “ ” ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC. 5 End code (Terminator) Messages must always end with a “ C R” (ASCII code: H0D). next page FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 6 Notes Precautions when writing messages The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command. If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several commands. If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided and several responses sent. Response message The PLC that received the command in the previous page sends the results of the processing to the computer. % or < 0 1 $ R C 0 C R 1 Start code 2 Unit No. of source (PLC that processed the command, in decimal) 3 Text (Processing results and communication error codes are stored here) 4 Check code (BCC, Hexadecimal) 5 End code Read value (specified contact is off) Command name (Processing results for contact area read) Response ($ indicates a normal processing result; ! indicates that an error occurred) (Two– digit) (One– digit) Figure 145: FP Σ Response message (overview) 1 Start code (Header) A “%” (ASCII code: H25) or “<” (ASCII code: H3C) must be at the beginning of a message. The response must start with the same start code that was at the beginning of the command. 2 Unit No. The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here. If 1:1 communication is being used, “01” will be stored here. 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command. The value should be read based on the content. If the processing is not completed successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the content of the error can be checked. % 0 1 $ R C 1 2 1 C R If the read command was used, the data that was read is stored here. If normal: Command name If error occurs: Error code Response code If normal: “#” (ASCII code: H23) If error occurs: “!” (ASCII code: H21) Figure 146: FP Σ Response message (text) FP Σ 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 7 4 Check code This is the BCC (block check code) used to detect errors using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the start code and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with character text. 5 End code (Terminator) There is always a “ C R” (ASCII code: H0D) at the end of the message. Notes Precautions when reading data If no response is returned, the command may not have arrived at the PLC, or the PLC may not be functioning. Check to make sure all of the communication specifications, such as the communication speed, data length, and parity, match between the computer and the PLC. If the received response contains a “!” instead of a “$”, the command was not processed successfully. The response will contain a communication error code, so confirm the content of the error. The unit number and command name will be the same for a command and its corresponding response, as shown in the figure below. This makes the correspondence between the command and the response clear. Command % 0 1 # R C C R Same Same Response % 0 1 $ R C C R Figure 147: FP Σ Command & response message (note) FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 8 7.1.4 Types of Commands that Can Be Used Command name Code Description Read contact area RC (RCS) (RCP) (RCC) Reads the on and off status of contacts. – Specifies only one point – Specifies multiple contacts. – Specifies a range in word units. Write contact area WC (WCS) (WCP) (WCC) Turns contacts on and off. – Specifies only one point – Specifies multiple contacts. – Specifies a range in word units. Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area. Write data area WD Writes data to a data area. Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter. Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value. Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value. Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value. Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored. Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored. Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC. Preset contact area (fill command) SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16–point on and off pattern. Preset data area (fill command) SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range. Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register. Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register. Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs. Program block read RP The PLC program is read on the computer side. Program block write WP The program read by the RP is written to the PLC. Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller. Abort AB Aborts communication. FP Σ 7.1 Computer Link 7 - 9 – Commands and responses used with the FP Σ have a dedicated header (start code) added to the “MEWTOCOL–COM” communica- tion protocol of the FP series PLC. – The contents of the specified header vary depending on the commu- nication conditions. – With the FP Σ , in addition to ordinary MEWTOCOL–COM, an expan- sion header is also supported that enables single frames of up to 2,048 characters to be sent. Tip – The number of characters that can be sent is restricted by the type of header and the command. No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max. 118 characters Max. 2048 characters Type of header % < FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 10 7.1.5 Setting the Communication Parameters when Using a Computer Link Setting of communication speed (baud rate) and communication format The settings for the COM. port communication speed and communication format are specified using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Options” on the menu bar, and click on the “COM.1 and 2 Port” tab. There are separate settings for COM. 1 and COM. 2. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 148: FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No. 412 Communication (Comm.) Mode Select the COM. port operation mode. Click on the button and select “Computer Link” from the displayed pull–down menu. No. 413 (for COM.1 port), No. 414 (for COM.2 port) Communication Format setting Char. Bit 8 Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity Odd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Bit 1 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminator CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header STX not exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default settings for the communication format are as shown at the right. To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM. port, enter the settings for the various items. No. 415 Baud rate (communication speed) setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is “9600 bps”. Change the communication speed to match the external device connected to the COM. port. Click on the button, and select one of the values from “2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps” on the displayed pull–down menu. 7.1.6 Restriction Either the computer link mode or the general–purpose serial communication mode can be used for the communication cassette COM. port. There are no restrictions when multiple ports are used. FP Σ 7.2 Connection Example with External Device 7 - 11 7.2 Connection Example with External Device This section contains the connection example with external device for computer link. 7.2.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with computer) Outline To use a 1:1 computer link with a computer, an RS232C cable is used to set up a 1:1 connection between the FP Σ and the computer. Communication is carried out by the PLC sending responses to commands sent from the computer side. Computer Command message Response message FP Σ RS232C Figure 149: FP Σ Computer link–connection example (computer) Communication cassette used for 1:1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1:1 computer link communication. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. FPG–COM1 FP Σ Communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communication with two external devices is possible. FPG–COM2 FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 12 Setting of system register To carry out 1:1 communication using a computer link, the system registers should be set as shown below. Settings when using the COM. 1 port No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 1 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port Computer link No. 413 Communication format for COM.1 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM.1 port 9600 bits/s to 115.2 k bits/s Settings when using the COM. 2 port No. Name Set value No. 411 Unit No. for COM.2 port 1 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.2 port Computer link No. 414 Communication format for COM.2 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM.2 port 9600 bits/s to 115.2 k bits/s Notes The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected computer. For information on setting the system registers to use a computer link, please refer to page 7 - 10. FP Σ 7.2 Connection Example with External Device 7 - 13 Connection example with computer When using the 1–channel RS232C type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Pin name Signal name Abbre. SD RD RS CS SG Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG Computer side (D–SUB 9–pin) Symbol CD RD SD ER SG DR RS CS RI Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 150: FP Σ Computer link – connection example 1 (computer) When using the 2–channel RS232C type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Pin name Signal name Abbre. S1 R1 S2 R2 SG Transmitted Data 1 Received Data 1 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 2 Signal Ground SD RD SD RD SG Computer side (D–SUB 9–pin) Symbol CD RD SD ER SG DR RS CS RI Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (To other device) Figure 151: FP Σ Computer link – connection example 2 (computer) Programming for a computer link To use a computer link, a program should be created that enables command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side. The PLC automatically sends back a response to commands. No communication program is required on the PLC side. Also, if a software program such as PCWAY is used on the computer side, PLC data can be easily compiled, without having to think about the MEWTOCOL–COM. FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 14 7.2.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with programmable display “GT10”) Outline A 1:1 computer link with a programmable display panel (GT10) connects the FP Σ and a programmable display, using an RS232C cable. Communication is carried out by the PLC sending responses to commands from the programmable display side. No program is required for communication. Operation can be carried out using the programmable display, simply by setting the mutual communications settings. Programmable display “GT10” FP Σ Command message Response message RS232C Figure 152: FP Σ Computer link – connection example (GT10) Communication cassette used for 1:1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1:1 computer link communication. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. FPG–COM1 FP Σ Communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1:1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communication with two external devices is possible. FPG–COM2 FP Σ 7.2 Connection Example with External Device 7 - 15 Setting of system register To carry out 1:1 communication using a computer link, the system registers should be set as shown below. Communication format setting for FP Σ side • Settings when using the COM. 1 port No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 1 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port Computer link No. 413 Communication format for COM.1 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM.1 port 19200 bits/s • Settings when using the COM. 2 port No. Name Set value No. 411 Unit No. for COM.2 port 1 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.2 port Computer link No. 414 Communication format for COM.2 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM.2 port 19200 bits/s Notes The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected programmable display. For information on setting the system registers to use a computer link, please refer to page 7 - 10. Communication format setting for GT10 When the GT10 is shipped from the factory, the communication format settings are as shown below. “GT Configuration” settings should be changed to match the application at hand. Item Description Baud rate 19200 bits/s Data length 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit (fixed) Parity bit Odd next page FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 16 Communication condition settings are specified using the parameter settings for the GT10 and the “GT Configuration” item in the GTWIN screen creation tool. For detailed information, please see the technical manual for the GT10. GTWIN GT Configuration settings “Communication Parameters” screen Figure 153: GTWIN GT Configuration setting screen (communication prameters) Connection example with programmable display “GT10” When using the 1–channel RS232C type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Pin name Signal name Abbre. SD RD RS CS SG Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG GT10 side (5–pin) Symbol SD RD RS CS SG Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 154: FP Σ Computer link – connection example 1 (GT10) When using the 2–channel RS232C type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Pin name Signal name Abbre. S1 R1 S2 R2 SG Transmitted Data 1 Received Data 1 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 2 Signal Ground SD RD SD RD SG GT10 side (5–pin) Symbol SD RD RS CS SG Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 (To other device) Figure 155: FP Σ Computer link – connection example 2 (GT10) FP Σ 7.2 Connection Example with External Device 7 - 17 Basic communication area setting for GT10 To carry out communication with a PLC, the “Basic Communication Area” setting for the internal device area in the PLC reserved by the GT10 in advance should be specified in the GT10 configuration settings. When the GT10 is shipped from the factory, the basic communication area is set as shown below. “GT Configuration” settings should be changed to match the application at hand. Item Description Word area DT0 to DT2 Bit area WR0 to WR2 The basic communication area is changed using the parameter settings for the GT10 and the “GT Configuration” item in the GTWIN screen creation tool. For detailed information, please see the technical manual for the GT10. GTWIN GT Configuration settings “Basic Setup” screen Figure 156: GTWIN GT Configuration setting screen (basic setup) FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 18 7.3 Computer Link (1:N communication) This section contains the 1:N communication of computer link. 7.3.1 Overview of 1:N Communication For a 1:N computer link, the computer and the FP Σ are connected through a C–NET adapter, and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable. Communication is carried out by the command specifying the unit number being sent from the computer side, and the PLC with that unit number sending a response back to the computer. RS232C RS485 Computer C–NET adapter Unit No.1 Unit No.2 Unit No.3 Unit No.4 The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message. The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message. Figure 157: FP Σ Overview of compute link function (1:N communication) If the FP Σ is used in combination with a communication cassette (the 1–channel RS485 type), no C–NET adapter is necessary on the PLC side. Tip 7.3.2 Communication Cassette Used for 1:N Communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used for 1:N communication with a computer link. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS485 type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a two–wire RS485 port. It supports 1:N computer links (C– NET), general–purpose serial communication, and a PLC link. FPG–COM3 FP Σ 7.3 Computer Link (1:N communication) 7 - 19 7.3.3 Settings of System Register and Unit No. Setting of system register To carry out 1:N communication with a computer link, the system registers should be set as shown below. COM. 1 port settings No. Name Set value No.410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 1 to 32 (Set the desired unit No.) No.412 Communication mode for COM.1 port Computer Link No.413 Communication format for COM.1 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No.415 Baud rate setting for COM.1 port 9600 bits/s Note The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected computer. Setting of unit No. (station number) The “Unit No.” parameter for each of the communication ports is set to “1” in the system register default settings. There is no need to change this if 1:1 communication is being used, but if 1:N communication is being used to connect multiple PLCs to transmission line, such as in a C–NET, the “Unit No.” must be specified so that the system can identify the unit targeted for communication. 2 1 3 4 RS232C RS485 Computer C–NET adapter A unit number is used to identify the destination to which a command is being sent. The PLC that sends a response can be identified by the unit number. Unit No. Figure 158: FP Σ Computer link – setting of unit No. (station No.) FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 20 Setting method The unit number is specified using the unit number setting switch on the side of the FP Σ control unit, or the system register settings. Setting the unit number setting switch to “0” makes the system register setting valid To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR, select “PLC Configuration” under “Option” on the menu bar, and then click on the “COM. Port” tab. There are two settings, one for the COM.1 port and one for the COM.2 port. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 159: FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No. 410 (for COM.1 port), No.411 (for COM.2 port) Unit No. Setting Click on the button, and select a unit number from among the numbers 1 to 32 displayed on the pull–down menu. FP Σ 7.3 Computer Link (1:N communication) 7 - 21 Unit No. setting using unit (station) No. setting switch The unit number setting switch is located inside the cover on the left side of the FP Σ control unit. The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to set a unit number between 1 and 31. Selector switch Dial switch Unit (station) No. setting switch Figure 160: FP Σ Computer link – unit (station) No. setting Relationship between unit number setting switch and unit numbers Unit No. Dial switch position Selector switch: off Selector switch: on 0 — 16 1 1 17 2 2 18 3 3 19 4 4 20 5 5 21 6 6 22 7 7 23 8 8 24 9 9 25 A 10 26 B 11 27 C 12 28 D 13 29 E 14 30 F 15 31 Unit numbers set using the unit number setting switch are valid only for the communication port of the communication cassette. Tool port unit numbers should be set using the system registers. Tip Note To make the unit number setting in the FPWIN GR valid, set the unit number setting switch to “0”. – The range of numbers that can be set using the unit number setting switch is from 1 to 31. – Setting the unit number setting switch to “0” makes the system register setting valid, so that a unit number between 1 and 31 can be set. FP Σ Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 - 22 7.3.4 Connection with External Device Connection diagram Pin name Signal name Abbre. FP Σ side (5–pin) Wiring should extend from one unit to the next. Never run two wires from the same unit to two other units. Correct wiring Incorrect wiring Transmission line 1 (+) Transmission line 1 (–) Transmission line 2 (+) Transmission line 2 (–) Terminal station setting To external device with RS485 port To external device with RS485 port E E Figure 161: FP Σ Computer link – connection diagram With 1 : N communication, the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables. The (+) and (–) signals of transmission line 1 and transmission line 2 are connected inside the communication cassette, and either port may be used as COM.1 port. Setting of terminal station In the PLC that serves as the final unit (terminal station), the transmission line (–) and the E terminal should be shorted. To C–NET adapter of computer connection Short the transmission line (–) and the E terminal in the final unit (terminal station). Transmission line Transmission line Transmission line Figure 162: FP Σ Computer link – terminal station setting Chapter 8 Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 Overview of Function 8 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 Program of General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 Communication Parameter Settings when Using General–purpose Serial Communications 8 - 6 . . 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 8 . . 8.2.1 Data Transmission to External Device 8 - 8 . . . . . . 8.2.2 Receiving Data from External Device 8 - 12 . . . . . 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 16 . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with Micro–Imagechecker) 8 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with FP series PLC) 8 - 22 . . 8.4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP Σ 8 - 29 . . . . . . 8.5 1:N communication 8 - 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Overview of 1:N Communication 8 - 31 . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Communication Cassette Used with 1 : N Communication 8 - 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Setting of System Register 8 - 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 8 - 33 8.6.1 When “STX not exist” is Set for Start Code and “CR” is Set for End Code 8 - 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 When “STX” is Set for Start Code and “ETX” is Set for End Code 8 - 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM. Port 8 - 37 . FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 2 FP Σ 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 3 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication This section contains overview of general–purpose serial communication. 8.1.1 Overview of Function What is the general–purpose serial communication? Using the COM. ports, it sends and receives data to and from an external device such as an image processing unit or a bar code reader. Data is read and written using the FP Σ ladder program, and data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM. port by means of the FP Σ data registers. Data register (DT) Image processing device Sending data using the F159 (MTRN) instruction Data is sent by transferring the data to a data register and then sending it us- ing the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Data is read from and written to an external device through the data registers. Transmitted data Received data FP Σ Receiving data to the data register(s) designated as the received buffer Data is received by data being sent from the RS232C port to the data register specified by the system register as the received buffer, and then being stored there automatically. Bar code reader Printer Figure 163: FP Σ General–purpose Serial Communication (overview) FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 4 Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general–purpose serial communication function, the “Data transmission” and “Data reception” functions described below are used. The F159 (MTRN) instruction and the “Reception done” flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between the FP Σ and an external device. Data transmission Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the transmission buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the data is output from the COM. port. Data writing Device with RS232C port Data register (DT) FP Σ Data transmission using F159(MTRN) instruction The end code specified by the system register is automatically added to the data that has been sent. The maximum volume of data that can be sent is 2,048 bytes. Figure 164: FP Σ Data transmission Data reception Input data from the COM. port is stored in the received buffer specified by the system register, and the “Reception done” flag goes on. Data can be received whenever the “Reception done” flag is off. FP Σ Data register (DT) Reception done flag: on Data receiving Device with RS232C port When data is received, the “Reception done” flag is controlled by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. No end code is included in the stored data. The maximum volume of data that can be received is 4,096 bytes. Figure 165: FP Σ Data reception FP Σ 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 5 8.1.2 Program of General–purpose Serial Communication The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data using the COM. port. The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used only with the FP Σ , and is an updated version of the earlier F144 (TRNS) instruction that allows multiple communication ports to be accommodated. Please be aware that the earlier F144 (TRNS) instruction cannot be used with the FP Σ . F159 (MTRN) instruction Data is sent to and received from an external device through the specified COM. port. Starting from DT100 are sent to the COM.1 (K1) port. the contents of 8 bytes Serial data communication R0 n S D F159 MTRN , DT 100 , K8 , K1 Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the . . . . . . . . transmission buffer. Devices that can be specified by n WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H . . . . . . . . Devices that can be specified by D Only the K constants (only K1 and K2) . . . . . . . . Figure 166: FP Σ F159 (MTRN) instruction (program) Transmission of data The amount of data specified by “n” is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by “S”, through the COM. port specified by “D”. Data can be sent with the start code and end code automatically attached. A maximum of 2,048 bytes can be sent. When the above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104, stored in the transmission buffer starting from DT100, are sent from the COM. port 1. Reception of data Reception of data is controlled by turning the “Reception done” R9038 or R9048 flag on and off. The received data is stored in the received buffer specified by the system register. Data can be received when the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns the “Reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 off. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 6 8.1.3 Communication Parameter Settings when Using General–purpose Serial Communications Setting of baud rate and communication format In the default settings, the COM. port is set to the computer link mode. When communication is carried out, system register settings should be entered for the following items. Settings for the COM. port baud rate and transmission format are entered using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Option (O)” on the menu bar, and click on the “COM. 1 & 2 Port” tab. There are separate settings for the COM.1 and COM.2 ports. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 167: FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting dialog box No. 412 Communication mode Select the COM. port operation mode. Click on the button, and select “General Communication” from the displayed pull– down menu. Character Bit 8 Bits . . . Parity Odd . . . . . . . . . Stop bit 1 . . . . . . . Terminator CR . . . . . Header STX not exist . . . . . . . . No. 413 (for COM.1 port), No. 414 (for COM.2 port) Communication format setting The default settings for the communication format are as shown at the right. To change the communication format to match the external device connected to the COM. port, enter the appropriate settings for the various items. FP Σ 8.1 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 7 No. 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rates for the ports is “9600 bit/s”. Set the baud rate to match the external device connected to the COM. port. Click on the button, and select one of the values from “2400 bit/s, 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s, 115200 bit/s” on the displayed pull–down menu. No. 416 (for COM.1 port), No. 418 (for COM.2 port) Starting address for data received No. 417 (for COM.1 port), No. 419 (for COM.2 port) Buffer capacity setting for data received To use general–purpose serial communication, the received buffer must be specified. In the default setting, the entire data register area is specified for use as the received buffer. To change the data register area used as the received buffer, specify the starting area using system register No. 416 (No. 418 for the COM. port 2) and the volume (number of words) using No. 417 (No. 419 for the COM. port 2). The received buffer layout is as shown below. Starting area specified by No. 416 (No. 418) * The system register number in parentheses indicates the number for the COM. port 2. The number of words is specified using No. 417 (No. 419). The number of received bytes is stored here. Received data storage area Reception buffer Figure 168: FP Σ Reception buffer FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 8 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices This section contains overview of communication “data transmission” and “data reception” with external devices. Communication with external device is handled through the data register. 8.2.1 Data Transmission to External Device Overview of data transmission Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the transmission buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the data is output from the COM. port. FP Σ Data register (DT) Data writing Received data Device with RS232C port Transmitted data Data transmission using F159 (MTRN) instruction Figure 169: FP Σ Overview of data transmission Data table for transmission (transmission buffer) Data table before transmission When transmission begins: K8 When transmission ends: K0 Data is transmitted in order from the low order byte. DT101 H42(B) DT102 H44(D) DT103 H46(F) DT104 H48(H) DT100 K8 H41(A) H43(C) H45(E) H47(G) Figure 170: FP Σ Data table for transmission (transmission buffer) FP Σ 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 9 Sample program for data transmission This program transmits the character “ABCDEFGH” to external device using COM.1 port. Data transmission command The internal relay “R10” is turned on at the tim- ing of the transmission condition “R0”. are sent to the COM.1 (K1) port. Data conversion The character “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code, and written to DT101 to DT104. Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent from the COM. port 1. Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes R10 R10 R0 R10 DF F95 ASC , M ABCDEFGH , DT101 F159MTRN ,DT 100 , K8 ,K1 Figure 171: FP Σ Sample program for data transmission The program described above is executed in the following sequence. 1 “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register. 2 That data is sent from the COM. port 1 using the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Explanatory diagram The character is converted to ASCII code and the data is stored in sent buffer. “H4142434445464748” FP Σ Data register (DT) Device with RS232C port Data transmission using F159 (MTRN) instruction Transmission buffer “ABCDEFGH” Figure 172: FP Σ Data transmission explanatory diagram Explanation of data table This is used as a data table for transmission, starting at the data register specified in “S”. Figure 173: FP Σ Data table for transmission Use an F0(MV) or F95(ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in “S”. At the beginning of transmission, the number of bytes to be transmitted is set. At the end of transmission, “0” is set. The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission. Transmission data storage area S S+1 S+2 S+n 1 2 3 4 FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 10 Explanation during transmission This is used as a data table for transmission, starting at the data register specified in “S”. When the execution condition of the F159(MTRN) instruction turns on, operation is as follows when the transmission done flag “R9039/R9049” is on: 1. “n” is preset in “S”. The reception done flag “R9038/R9048” is turned off, and the reception data number is cleared to “0”. 2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower–order byte in “S+1” of the table. – During transmission, the transmission done flag “R9039/R9049” turns off. – If system register 413 or 414 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header (start code) is automatically added to the beginning of the data. – The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data. Transmission data A B C D E F G H DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 R9039 (R9049) Execution condition R0 F159 (MTRN) execution During transmission During this interval the F159(MTRN) instruction cannot be executed. on off on off ( C R ) Figure 174: Explanation during transmission 3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the “S” value is cleared to “0” and the transmission done flag “R9039/R9049” turns on. When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions, use one of the following methods: Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number. If you also do not wish to add an end code to receptions, set system register 413 or 414 to Terminator “None”. Example: Program for transmitting 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator (end code) R0 DF 1 1 Specify “K–8” F159 MTRN, DT100, K–8, K1 Figure 175: FP Σ Data transmission sample program FP Σ 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 11 – Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator (end code) is added automatically. – When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413 or 414, do not add the header (start code) to the transmission data. The header (start code) is added automatically. – When using the 1–ch RS232C type communication cassette, transmission does not take place until CS (Clear to Send) turns on. If you are not going to connect to the other device, connect to RS (Request to Send). – The maximum number of transmission bytes “n” is 2048. – Contact numbers in parentheses indicate COM. port 2 contacts. Tip FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 12 8.2.2 Receiving Data from External Device Overview of data reception FP Σ Data register (DT) Device with RS232C port Data receiving Reception done flag: on Figure 176: FP Σ Data reception Data input from the COM. port is stored in the received buffer specified by the system register, and the “Reception done” flag goes on. If the “Reception done” flag is off, data can be received at any time. Sample program for data reception Data “10 byte” received in the received buffer through the COM.1 port is read to DT0. Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data, the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the Reception Done (R9038) contact, based on the empty data. Retrieving received data The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which it is stored (from DT201 ) and sent to DT0. Reception done detection The internal relay (R10) is turned on at the “Reception done (R9038)” timing. Starting from DT100 The contents of the four words from DT201 to DT204 are written to data registers DT0 to DT4. the contents of 0 bytes are sent to the COM.1 (K1) port. R9038 F10 BKMV ,DT201 , DT204 ,DT0 F159 MTRN ,DT100 ,K0 , K1 R10 DF R10 R10 Figure 177: FP Σ Sample program for data reception The program described above is executed in the following sequence. 1. Data is received from the RS232C device to the received buffer. 2. The “Reception done R9038 (R9048) contact” is turned on. 3. The received data is sent from the received buffer to the area starting with the data register DT0. 4. The F159 (MTRN) instruction based on the empty data is executed, which resets the buffer writing point and turns off the Reception Done (R9038 (R9048) contact. The system is then ready to receive the next data. FP Σ 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 13 Explanatory diagram “H4142434445464748” FP Σ Data register (DT) Device with RS232 port Data receiving Received buffer Reception done (R9038: ON) Reception ready (R9038: OFF) Data reading Figure 178: FP Σ Data reception explanatory diagram DT200 to DT204 are used as the reception buffer. System register settings are as fol- lows: – System register 416: K200 – System register 417: K5 Reception buffer when reception is completed. DT201 H42(B) H41(A) DT202 H44(D) H43(C) DT203 H46(F) H45(E) DT204 H48(H) H47(G) DT200 K8 Data table for reception (received buffer) This shows the status of the data table when the above program is run. The received number of bytes is stored as data is stored. Received data is stored in order from the lower–order byte. Figure 179: FP Σ Data table for reception (received buffer) Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the RS232C port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the reception buffer. (Word) 0 The number of bytes received is stored in this area. Reception data storage area (The circled numbers indicate the order of storage.) 1 2 n 1 2 3 4 Figure 180: FP Σ Data table for reception Data registers are used for the reception buffer. Specify the data registers in system registers 416 to 419.The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the reception buffer. The initial value is “0”. Received data is stored in the received data storage area in order from the lower–order byte. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 14 Explanation during reception When the reception done flag R9038(R9048) is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device. (The R9038(R9048) is off during the first scan after RUN). 1)Incoming data is stored in order from the lower–order byte of the 2nd–word area of the reception buffer. Header and terminator (Start and end codes) are not stored. A B … T U V ( C R ) Beginning of reception Received data R9038(R9048) Execution condition R0 Reception is possible … Reception is possible Reception is not pos- sible Reopening on off on off Execution of F159(MTRN) instruction Figure 181: Explanation during reception 2)When the terminator (end code) is received, the reception done flag “R9038(R9048)” turns on. Reception of any further data is prohibited. 3)When an F159(MTRN) instruction is executed, the reception done flag “R9038(R9048)” turns off, the number of received bytes is cleared, and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower–order byte. FP Σ 8.2 Overview of Communication with External Devices 8 - 15 To perform repeated reception of data, refer to the following steps. 1 Receive data 2 Reception done (R9038/R9048: on, reception prohibited) 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159(MTRN) instruction (R9038/R9048: off, reception possible) 5 Receive subsequent data Preparation of reception The reception done flag “R9038(R9048)” turns on when data reception from the external device is completed. Reception of any further data is prohibited. To receive subsequent data, you must execute an F159(MTRN) instruction to turn off the reception done flag “R9038(R9048)”. Tip R0 F159 MTRN, DT100, K 0, K 1 To repeatedly perform only reception, specify K0. R9038(R9048) also turns off when transmission is performed with a byte number specification. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 16 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices This section contains the connection example with external devices. 8.3.1 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with Micro–Imagechecker) Outline The FP Σ and Micro–Imagechecker A200/A100 are connected using an RS232C cable, and the results of the scan are stored in the data registers of the FP Σ . Scan result “1012341234 C R ” is received Communication mode: General Communication Communication mode: Normal mode Micro–Imagechecker A200/A100 Start command “%S C R ” is sent Figure 182: FP Σ Connection example with external device (micro–imagechecker) When the scan start code “%S C R” is sent from the FP Σ side, the scan result is returned from the Micro–Imagechecker as the response. Communication cassette used with 1:1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 : 1 general–purpose serial communication. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. FPG–COM1 FP Σ Communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communica- tion with two external devices is possible. FPG–COM2 FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 17 Setting of system register In the default settings, the COM. port is set to the computer link mode. To carry out 1 :1 communication using general–purpose serial communication, the system registers should be set as shown below. Communication format setting for FP Σ • Settings when using the COM. port 1 No. Name Set value No. 412 Communication mode General communication No. 413 Communication format Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity: Odd . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate 9600 bit/s No. 416 Starting address for data received DT200 No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte • Settings when using the COM. port 2 No. Name Set value No. 412 Communication mode General communication No. 414 Communication format Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity: Odd . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate 9600 bit/s No. 418 Starting address for data received DT200 No. 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 18 Communication format setting for Micro–Imagechecker To set the communication mode and transmission format settings for the Micro– Imagechecker, select “5: Communication” under “5: ENVIRONMENT”, and set the following items. No. Name Set value No. 51 Communication mode Normal Mode No. 52 RS232C Baud rate (bps) 9600 . . . . . . Length 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity Odd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Control None . . . . . . . . Serial communication setting for Micro–Imagechecker To enter settings relating to serial communication for the Micro–Imagechecker, select “53: Serial Output” under “5: Communication”, and set the following items. No. Name Set value No. 53 Serial Output Output 5 Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invalid Digit Repl. 0 . . . . . . . . . . Read End None . . . . . . . . . . . . Process End None . . . . . . . . . Numerical Calculation Output . Judgment Output . . . . . . . . . . . . – If “Del” is specified for the invalid processing parameter, zero suppression processing will be carried out on the output data, and the output format will be changed. Always make sure “Repl. 0” is specified. – When outputting data to an external device, numerical calculation is required, so “Out” should be specified for the “Numerical calculation” parameter. – When the above settings are specified, data with the contents shown below will be output from the Micro–Imagechecker. Tip C R 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Terminator (End code) Results of numerical calculation No.1 Judgment output No.2 0=NG Judgment output No.1 1=OK FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 19 Connection example with Micro–Imagechecker “A200/A100” • When using the RS232C 1–channel type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Signal name Abbr. SD RD RS CS SG Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG Micro–Imagechecker side Symbol FG SD RD RS CS (Not used) SG CD ER Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pin name Figure 183: FP Σ Connection example with micro–imagechecker 1 • When using the RS232C 2–channel type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Symbol FG SD RD RS CS SG CD ER Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (To other device) Micro–Imagechecker side Pin name Signal name Abbr. S1 R1 S2 R2 SG Transmitted Data 1 Received Data 1 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 2 Signal Ground SD RD SD RD SG (Not used) Figure 184: FP Σ Connection example with micro–imagechecker 2 FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 20 Procedure of communication In the following example, the Micro–Imagechecker is connected to the COM. 1 port. Ladder program Transmission Data transmission with F159 (MTRN) Scan command “1012345 C R ” is received. Start command “%S C R ” transmission Reception buffer writing point reset Data register RS232C port Micro–Imagechecker Reception R9039: off and R9038: off Transmission done flag (R9039: ON) Reception done flag (R9038: ON) Empty data transmission with F159 (MTRN) R9039: off and R9038: off Reception buffer writing point reset Data read “1012345 C R ” Start command “%S C R ” is set in transmission buffer. Figure 185: FP Σ Procedure of communication (micro–imagechecker) FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 21 Sample program In the following example, the Micro–Imagechecker is connected to the COM. 1 port. R0 DF R10 F95 ASC , R10 M %S , DT101 F159 MTRN , DT 100 , K2 , K1 R9038 DF , D201 , DT204 , DT0 R11 F10 BKMV R11 R11 , DT 100 , K0 , K1 F159 MTRN Transmission Reception Data transmission command The internal relay “R10” is turned on at the timing of the transmission condition “R0”. Data conversion The start command “%S” character is con- verted to ASCII code, and written to DT101 to DT106. Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent from the COM. port 1 Reception done detection The internal relay “R11” is turned on at the “Reception done (R9038)” timing. Retrieving received data The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which it is stored (from DT201) and sent to DT0. Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data, the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the Reception Done (R9038) contact, based on the empty data. Ten spaces inserted With DT100 as the transmission buffer the contents consisting of two bytes of it are sent to COM. 1 (K1) port. Starting from DT100 the contents of 0 bytes are sent to the COM. 1 (K1) port. The 4–word contents from DT201 to DT204 are written to data registers DT0 to DT3. Figure 186: FP Σ Sample program (for micro–imagechecker) The various buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and received buffers when the sample program is run. Transmission buffer Number of bytes to be transmitted (Condition before transmission) DT100 DT101 K2 H53 (S) DT204 H25 (%) DT200 DT201 DT202 DT203 Reception buffer K7 Received number of bytes Received data is stored in order from the lower–order byte. H30 (0) H31 (1) H32 (2) H31 (1) H34 (4) H33 (3) H35 (5) (Condition when reception is completed) Figure 187: FP Σ Various buffer statuses FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 22 8.3.2 Connection Example with External Device (1:1 communication with FP series PLC) Outline Connect the FP Σ and the other FP series PLC using the RS232C interface, and carry out communication using the MEWTOCOL–COM communication protocol. Communication mode: General Communication Communication mode: Computer link FP series PLC Data area read command “%01#RDD00000 00001 ** CR” transmission Value of specified data register Figure 188: FP Σ Connection example with external device (FP series PLC) When the data area read command “%01#RDD00000 00001 ** C R” is sent from the FP Σ side, the values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response. For example, if the value K100 is stored in DT0 and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC, “%01$RD6400C8006F C R” is sent as a response to the command. If there is an error, “%01! OO ** C R” is returned (OO is the error code). In addition to data area read and write commands, the MEWTOCOL–COM is also provided with contact area reading and writing, and many other commands. When two FP Σ units are involved, data can easily be exchanged (shared) using the PLC link function that comes with the RS485 1–channel type communication cassette. Communication cassette used with 1:1 communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1 : 1 general–purpose serial communication. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a five–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. RS/CS control is possible. FPG–COM1 FP Σ Communication cassette 2–channel RS232C type This communication cassette is a 2–channel unit with a three–wire RS232C port. It supports 1 : 1 computer links and general–purpose serial communication. Communica- tion with two external devices is possible. FPG–COM2 FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 23 Setting of system register In the default settings, the COM. port is set to the computer link mode. To carry out 1 :1 communication using general–purpose serial communication, the system registers should be set as shown below. Communication format setting for FP Σ • Settings when using the COM. 1 port No. Name Set value No. 412 Communication mode General communication No. 413 Communication format Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity: Odd . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bit/s No. 416 Starting address for data received DT200 No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte • Settings when using the COM. 2 port No. Name Set value No. 412 Communication mode General communication No. 414 Communication format Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity: Odd . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bit/s No. 418 Starting address for data received DT200 No. 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received 100 byte Communication format setting for FP series PLC (FP0, FP1) No. Name Set value No. 412 Communication mode for COM. port Computer link No. 413 Communication format for COM. port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity: Odd . . . . . . . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 414 Baud rate for COM. port 19200 bits/s FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 24 Connection example with FP series PLC (FP0, FP1) • When using the RS232C 1–channel type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Signal name Abbr. SD RD RS CS SG Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG Pin name FP 0 COM. port side (3–pin) Symbol S R G FP0 Connection with COM. port FP Σ side (5–pin) Signal name Abbr. SD RD RS CS SG Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Signal Ground SD RD RS CS SG FP1 COM. port side (9–pin) Symbol FG SD RD RS CS — SG Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pin name — — FP1 Connection with COM. port Figure 189: FP Σ Connection example with FP series PLC–1 • When using the RS232C 2–channel type of communication cassette FP Σ side (5–pin) Signal name Abbr. S1 R1 S2 R2 SG Signal Ground SD RD SD RD SG Pin name FP0 COM. port side (3–pin) Symbol S R G FP0 Connection with COM. port (To other device) Transmitted Data 1 Received Data 1 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 2 FP Σ side (5–pin) Symbol FG SD RD RS CS SG Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (To other device) FP1 COM. port side (9–pin) Pin name Signal name Abbr. S1 R1 S2 R2 SG Transmitted Data 1 Received Data 1 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 2 Signal Ground SD RD SD RD SG — — — FP0 Connection with COM. port Figure 190: FP Σ Connection example with FP series PLC–2 FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 25 Procedure of communication In this example, an FP series PLC is connected to the COM. 1 port, and “K100” is being stored to DT0 of the PLC on the other end, and “K200” to DT1. Ladder program Transmission Data transmission with F159 (MTRN) Data register value of PLC on other end is received “%01#RDD00000 00001 * * C R ” transmission Reception buffer writing point reset Data register RS232C port FP series PLC Reception R9039: off and R9038: off Transmission done flag (R9039: on) Reception done flag (R9038: on) Empty data transmission with F159 (MTRN) R9039: off and R9038: off Reception buffer writing point reset Data read Data area read command is set in transmission buffer Data area reading command Error code If normal: “%01$RD6400C8006F C R ” If error occurs: “%01! C R ” BCC Figure 191: FP Σ Procedure of communication (FP series PLC) FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 26 Sample program The following shows an example in which an FP series PLC is connected to the COM. 1 port. R0 DF R10 R10 F159 MTRN , DT 100 , K19 , K1 R9038 DF , D201 , DT208 , DT0 R11 F10 BKMV R11 R11 , DT 100 , K0 , K1 F159 MTRN M 00001 , DT107 F95 ASC , M %01#RDD00000, DT101 F95 ASC , R11 =, DT1, H2431 DF R12 , DT3 , DT50 F72 AHEX , K8 R12 Transmission Reception Data transmission command The internal relay “R10” is turned on at the timing of the transmission condition “R0”. Data conversion “%01#RDD00000” is converted to ASCII code, and written to DT101 to DT106. “00001 ** ” is converted to ASCII code, and written to DT107 to DT112. Data transmission The data in the transmission buffer is sent from the COM. port 1 Reception done detection The internal relay “R11” is turned on at the “Reception done (R9038)” timing. Retrieving received data The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which it is stored (DT201 to ) and sent to DT0. Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data, the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the Reception Done (R9038) contact, based on the empty data. Ten spaces inserted Check of received data To determine whether the received data is a normal response, the comparison in- struction is used to check whether the character string “1$” is stored in DT1. Check of received data The eight–character ASCII code beginning with DT3 is converted to a hexadecimal value and stored in DT50 and DT51. With DT100 as the transmission buffer the contents consisting of 19 bytes of it are sent to COM. 1 (K1) port. Starting from DT100 the contents consisting of 0 bytes are sent to the COM. 1 (K1) port. The contents of 8 words from DT201 to DT208 are written to data registers DT0 to DT7. Figure 192: FP Σ Sample program (for FP series PLC) FP Σ 8.3 Connection Example with External Devices 8 - 27 The various buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and received buffers when the sample program is run. Transmission buffer Number of bytes to be transmitted (Condition before transmission) DT100 DT101 K19 Reception buffer K16 Received number of bytes Received data is stored in order from the lower–order byte. H30 (0) H31 (%) H32 ($) H31 (1) H34 (D) H33 (R) H34 (4) H36 (6) (Condition when reception is completed) DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT200 DT201 DT202 DT203 DT204 DT205 DT206 DT207 DT208 H30 (0) H30 (0) H38 (8) H43 (C) H30 (0) H30 (0) H46 (F) H36 (6) H30 (0) H25 (%) H23 (#) H31 (1) H44 (D) H52 (R) H30 (0) H44 (D) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H30 (0) H2A ( * ) H31 (1) H2A ( * ) Figure 193: FP Σ Various buffer statuses FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 28 Contents of the response: If K100 is stored in DT0 and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the other side, “%01$RD6400C8006F C R” is returned from the FP series PLC on the other side as the response when the program is executed. The re- ceived data is stored in the data registers as shown below. Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other side In the program, the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other side is converted to hexadecimal data using the F72 (AHEX) (hexadecimal ASCII → HEX conversion) instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51, only if the character string “$1” stored in DT1 detected as a comparison instruction. If an error occurs, “%01!  CR” is returned as the response. ( is the error code and  is the BCC.) Tip DT0 H25 (%) H30 (0) H31 (1) H24 ($) H52 (R) H44 (D) DT1 DT2 DT3 H36 (6) H34 (4) H30 (0) H30 (0) DT4 H31 DT7 H30 (0) H30 (0) DT6 H43 (C) H38 (8) DT5 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Value of DT0 in the PLC on the other side H46 Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other side (F) (1) BCC DT3 H36 (6) H34 (4) H30 (0) H30 (0) DT4 H30 (0) H30 (0) DT6 H43 (C) H38 (8) DT5 16 Hexadecimal ASCII → DT50 H64 (K100) H00 HC8 (K200) H00 DT51 Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other side Value of DT0 in the PLC on the other side Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other side Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Value of DT0 in the PLC on the other side HEX conversion instruction (F72) FP Σ 8.4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP Σ 8 - 29 8.4 Data Transmitted and Received with the FP Σ The following four points should be kept in mind when accessing data in the FP Σ transmission and received buffers. – Data in the transmission and received buffers, that is being sent and received, is in ASCII code. – If the transmission format settings indicate that a start code will be used, the code STX (H02) will automatically be added at the beginning of the data being sent. – An end code is automatically added to the end of the data being sent. – There is no end code on the data stored in the received buffer. When sending data: Data written to the transmission buffer will be sent just as it is. Example: When the data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to a device with RS232C port. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data. Conversion of ASCII code “ 1 2 3 4 5 ” (Data to be transmitted) Conversion of ASCII code (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) H 31 32 33 34 35 (Coded data) Figure 194: FP Σ Conversion of ASCII code If DT100 is being used as the transmission buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register (DT101), in two–byte units consisting of the upper byte and lower byte. DT103 DT102 DT101 Upper byte H35 H34 H33 H32 H31 (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Figure 195: FP Σ Example (transmission buffer) FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 30 When receiving data: The data of received area being read is ASCII code data. Example: When the data “12345 C R ” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port If DT200 is being used as the received buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte. DT203 DT202 DT201 H35 H34 H33 H32 H31 (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Figure 196: FP Σ Example (received buffer) FP Σ 8.5 1:N communication 8 - 31 8.5 1:N communication This section contains the overview of general–purpose serial communication (1:N communication) 8.5.1 Overview of 1:N Communication The FP Σ and the external unit with the unit number are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches the external unit, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data. FP Σ Data register (DT) RS485 Received data Data is received into received buffer. Transmitted data Data transmission using F159 (MTRN) instruction Data is sent and received through the data registers. Figure 197: FP Σ General–purpose serial communication (1:N communication) 8.5.2 Communication Cassette Used with 1 : N Communication The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1: N general–purpose serial communication. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS485 type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a two–wire RS485 port. It supports 1 : N computer links (C– NET), general–purpose serial communication, and a PLC link. FPG–COM3 FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 32 8.5.3 Setting of System Register The following types of communication cassettes can be used with 1: N general–purpose serial communication. Settings when using the COM. 1 port No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. 1 to 32 (Set the desired unit No.) No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port General communication No. 413 Communication format for COM.1 port Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bits/s No. 416 Starting address for data received Set the desired address. No. 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received Set the desired capacity. (Max. 2,048 byte) Settings when using the COM. 2 port No. Name Set value No. 411 Unit No. 1 to 32 (Set the desired unit No.) No. 412 Communication mode General communication No. 414 Communication format Character bit: 8 bits . . . . . Parity check: Odd . . . . . Stop bit: 1 bit . . . . . . . . . Terminator: CR . . . . . . . Header: STX not exist . . . . . . . . . No. 415 Baud rate setting 9600 bits/s No. 418 Starting address for data received Set the desired address. No. 419 Buffer capacity setting for data received Set the desired capacity. (Max. 2,048 byte) Note The transmission format and baud rate should be set to match the device connected to the FP Σ . FP Σ 8.6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 8 - 33 8.6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 8.6.1 When “STX not exist” is Set for Start Code and “CR” is Set for End Code When receiving data: The relationship between the various flags “Reception done flag and Transmission done flag” and the F159 (MTRN) instruction External received data R9038 (R9048) Reception done flag F159 (MTRN) instruction execution A B C CR D E F G R9039 (R9049) Transmission done flag Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Duplex transmission disabled while F159 (MTRN) instruction is being executed Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on. A A B B C A B C A B C E F C E B G E <1> <2> <3> <0> <1> <2> <3> Reception buffer Number of recep- tion bytes Stored Number of bytes received is cleared when F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed on off on off on off * : Write pointer Write pointer * : Write pointer Figure 198: FP Σ Flag operation when receiving data (STX not exit and CR setting) Half–duplex transmission method should be used for general–purpose serial communication. Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 (R9048) is on. When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) returns to the initial address in the reception buffer. When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the error flag R9037 (R9047), reception done flag R9038 (R9048) and transmission done flag R9039 (R9049) go off. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 34 Duplex transmission is disabled while the F159 (MTRN) instruction is being executed. Check the transmission done flag R9039(R9049). Reception stops if the error flag R9037 (R9047) goes on. To resume reception, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turns off the error flag. Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 (R9048) changes even while a scan is in progress. Example: If the reception completed flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan. To avoid this, an internal relay should be substituted at the beginning of the program. FP Σ 8.6 Flag Operations When Using Serial Communication 8 - 35 8.6.2 When “STX” is Set for Start Code and “ETX” is Set for End Code When receiving data: The relationship between the various flags “Reception done flag and Transmission done flag” and the F159 (MTRN) instruction Number of bytes received is cleared when F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed. A B C STX D H ETX <1> <2> <3> <0> <0> <1> <1>

 F G STX Reception done flag is turned off by execut- ing the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Reception code is deleted by F159 (MTRN) instruction. <1> <2> <2> <0> <1> Number of bytes received is cleared when start code is received.     External received data R9038 (R9048) Reception done flag F159 (MTRN) instruction execution Reception buffer Number of reception bytes Stored * : Write pointer Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on Number of bytes received is cleared when start code is received. A A A A B B B B C C C C C






C C C C C D D D D G G H H D Figure 199: FP Σ Flag operation when receiving data (STX and ETX setting) The data is stored in the reception buffer in sequential order, but at the point at which the start code is received, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer. Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 (R9048) is on. When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer. If there are two start codes, data following the later start code is overwritten and stored in the reception buffer. The reception done flag R9038 (R9049) is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Because of this, if the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed at the same time that the terminal code is received, the reception done flag will not be detected. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 36 When sending data: The relationship between the various flags “Reception done flag and Transmission done flag” and the F159 (MTRN) instruction b a b a <2> <1> <2> <1> <0> b a <0> b a <0> d e c <3> STX ETX ETX STX a b c d e <0> on off on off d e c d e c d e c d e c Transmission Transmission F159 (MTRN) instruction execution R9039 (R9049) Transmission done flag Transmission buffer Number of bytes not yet transmitted Duplex transmission disabled while F159 (MTRN) instruction is being executed Transmitted data * : Transmission point Figure 200: FP Σ Flag operation when sending data (STX and ETX setting) Start code (STX) and end code (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted, and the data is transmitted to an external device. When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the transmission done flag R9039 (R9049) go off. Duplex transmission is disabled while the F159 (MTRN) instruction is being executed. Check the transmission done flag R9039 (R9049). FP Σ 8.7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM. Port 8 - 37 8.7 Changing the Communication Mode of COM. Port An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between “general communication mode” and “computer link mode”. To do so, specify “H8000” in “n” (the number of transmission bytes) and execute the instruction. Changing from “general port” to “computer link” Specify the port to be changed F159 MTRN, DT100, H8000 K1 R0 R9032 DF Set to H8000 1 1 Changing from “computer link” to “general port” Specify the port to be changed Set to H8000 F159 MTRN, DT100, H8000 K1 R0 R9032 DF 1 1 Figure 201: FP Σ Changing the communication mode of COM. port RS232C port selection flag in R9032 or R9042. Turns on when “general communication mode” is selected. Note When the power is turned on, the mode of use selected in system register No. 412 takes effect. FP Σ Communication Function 2 General–purpose Serial Communication 8 - 38 Chapter 9 Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9.1 PLC Link 9 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Overview of Function 9 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings When Using a PLC Link 9 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Setting of Communication Mode 9 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Setting of Unit No. 9 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Allocation of Link Relay and Link Register 9 - 9 . . 9.3 Connection Example of PLC Link 9 - 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Using a PLC Link with Three FP Σ Units 9 - 15 . . . 9.3.2 Sample Programs 9 - 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 2 FP Σ 9.1 PLC Link 9 - 3 9.1 PLC Link This section contains the overview of PLC link function. 9.1.1 Overview of Function What is the PLC Link? The PLC link is an economic way of linking two PLCs, using a twisted–pair cable. Data is shared between the PLCs using a link relay (L) and a link register (LD). With a PLC link, the statuses of the link relays and link registers for one PLC are automatically fed back to other PLCs on the same network, so data that needs to be consistent among all the PLCs on the network, such as the target production values and product codes, can be easily shared. Also, this allows easy control of processes that need to be booted at the same timing. The PLC link is not set to be used in the default settings, so the setting of system register No. 412 should be changed to “PLC Link” in order to use the function. The various PLC units and link areas are allocated using the system registers. For more detailed information, please see page 9 - 5, “Communication Parameter Settings When Using a PLC Link”. No.1 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.3 No.2 RS485 Transmitted area Received area Received area Transmitted area Received area Received area Transmitted area Received area FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) FP Σ (Unit No. 4) The link relays and link registers of the various PLCs contain areas where data is sent and areas where data is received, and these are used to share data among the PLCs. Figure 202: FP Σ PLC link function (overview) FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 4 Overview of PLC link operation Link relay: Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all of the other PLCs on the same network. Link register: If the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register are changed in all of the PLCs on the same network. Link relay R0 L0 L0 Y0 L0 Y0 L0 Y0 R0 F0, MV, K100, LD0 LD 0 100 LD 0 100 LD 0 100 LD 0 100 RS485 FP Σ FP Σ FP Σ FP Σ If the link relay L0 for the unit (No. 1) is turned on, the status change is fed back to the ladder programs of other units, and the Y0 of the other units is output. No. 2 Link register No. 3 Link register No. 4 Link register No. 1 Link register Link register If a constant of 100 is written to the LD0 of unit No. 1, the contents of LD0 in unit No. 2 are also changed to a constant of 100. Figure 203: FP Σ Overview of PLC link operation FP Σ 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 5 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings This section contains the communication parameter settings “communication mode, communication format, unit No. and link area allocation” when using PLC link function. 9.2.1 Setting of Communication Mode In the default settings, the COM. ports are not set so that communication is enabled. Communication mode settings are entered using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Option (O)” on the menu bar, and click on the “COM. Port” tab. There are separate settings for the COM.1 and COM.2 ports. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 204: FPWIN GR – PLC Configuration setting dialog box No. 412 Communication Mode (Comm. Mode) Select the COM. port communication mode. Click on the button, and select “PC Link” from the displayed pull–down menu. When using a PLC link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed as shown below. – Communication format; Character Bit: 8 bits, Parity: Odd, Stop Bit: 1 – Baud rate: 115200 bps Tip FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 6 9.2.2 Setting of Unit No. Unit No. In the default settings in the system registers, the “Unit No.” parameter for the communication port is set to “1”. In a PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the “Unit No.” parameter must be set in order to identify the various PLCs. 1 2 3 4 16 Unit No. RS485 Max. 16 units Figure 205: FP Σ Unit No. for PLC link The unit number is a number assigned to a given PLC in order to identify that particular PLC. Unit numbers should be specified in such a way that the same number is not used for more than one PLC on the same network. Setting method The unit number is specified using the system registers settings in the FPWIN GR programming tool, and the unit number setting switch on the side of the main unit. Setting the unit number setting switch to “0” makes the system register settings valid. FP Σ 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 7 To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR, select “PLC Configuration” under “Option” on the menu bar, and then click on the “COM. Port” tab. There are two settings, one for the COM.1 port and one for the COM.2 port. PLC Configuration setting dialog box Figure 206: FPWIN GR – PLC Configuration setting dialog box No. 410 (for COM.1 port), No. 411 (for COM.2 port) Unit No. Click on the button, and select a unit number from among the numbers 1 to 16 displayed on the pull–down menu. FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 8 Unit No. setting using unit No. setting switch The unit number setting switch is located inside the cover on the left side of the FP Σ . The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to set a unit number between 1 and 16. ON Selector switch Dial switch Unit No. setting switch Figure 207: FP Σ Unit No. setting using switch Relationship between unit number setting switch and unit numbers Unit No. Dial switch position Selector switch: off Selector switch: on 0  16 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Not available 9 9 A 10 B 11 C 12 D 13 E 14 F 15 To make the unit number setting in the FPWIN GR valid, set the unit number setting switch to “0”. When using the PLC link function, set the range of unit numbers as 1 to 16. • The range of numbers that can be set using the unit number setting switch is from 1 to 16. • Setting the unit number setting switch to “0” makes the system register settings valid. FP Σ 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 9 9.2.3 Allocation of Link Relay and Link Register Link area allocation The PLC link function is a function that involves all of the PLCs that have been booted in the MEWNET–W0 mode. To use the PLC link function, a link area needs to be allocated. Set the allocations for both the link relays and link registers. Link area allocations are specified using system registers. System registers No. Name Set value No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 0 to 64 words No. 41 Range of link register used for PLC link 0 to 128 words No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission 0 to 63 No. 43 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words No. 44 Starting no. for link register transmission 0 to 127 No. 45 Link register transmission size 0 to 127 words Relation of system register set value to link area Link relay Received area Received area Transmitted area Not used area for PLC link No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 0 No. 43 Link relay transmission size No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission Max. 64 (word) Figure 208: FP Σ Link relay allocation Link register Received area Received area Transmitted area Not used area for PLC link No. 41 Range of link register used for PLC link No. 45 Link register transmission size No. 44 Starting no. for link register transmission Max. 128 (word) Figure 209: FP Σ Link register allocation FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 10 Link areas consist of link relays and link registers for PLC link and used with respective control units. The link relay which can be used in an area for PLC link is maximum 1,024 points, and the link register is maximum 128 words. Tip Example of link area allocation The areas for PLC link is divided into transmitted areas and received areas. The link relays and link registers are transmitted from the transmitted area to the received area of a different FP Σ . Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the received area on the receiving side. Link relay allocation No.1 No.1 No.1 No.2 No.2 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.2 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 63 WL0 63 39 40 39 40 Received area Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Transmitted area FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) FP Σ (Unit No. 4) Received area Received area Received area Figure 210: Example of link area allocation System register No. Name Set value of various control unit No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 64 64 64 64 No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission 0 20 40 0 No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0 FP Σ 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 11 Link register allocation No.1 No.1 No.1 No.2 No.2 No.3 No.3 No.3 No.2 LD0 39 40 127 LD0 39 40 127 LD0 127 LD0 127 79 80 79 80 Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Transmitted area Received area FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) FP Σ (Unit No. 4) Received area Received area Received area Figure 211: Example of link register allocation System register No. Name Set value of various control unit No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 41 Range of link register used for PLC link 128 128 128 128 No. 44 Starting no. for link register transmission 0 40 80 0 No. 45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0 When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 transmitted area can be transmitted to the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 received areas. Also, the No. 1 received area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 transmitted areas. No. 4 is allocated as a received area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3, but cannot transmit it to other unit. FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 12 Using only a part of the link area Link areas are available for PLC link, and link relay 1,024 points (64 words) and link register 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers. Link relay allocation No. Name No. 1 No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 50 No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission 20 No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 With the above setting, the 14 words (224 points) consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays. Figure 212: Using only a part of the link relay area Link register allocation No. Name No. 1 No. 41 Range of link register used for PLC link 100 No. 44 Starting no. for link register transmission 40 No. 45 Link register transmission size 40 With the above setting, the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers. Figure 213: Using only a part of the link register area WL0 19 20 63 39 40 49 50 Transmitted area Received area Received area Internal relay Used Not used LD0 39 40 127 79 80 99 100 Transmitted area Received area Received area Internal register Used Not used FP Σ 9.2 Communication Parameter Settings 9 - 13 Precautions when allocating link areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area, be aware that an error will result, and communication will be disabled. Avoid overlapping transmitted areas When sending data from the transmitted area to the received area of another FP Σ , there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the received area on the receiving side. In the example shown below, there is an area between No. 2 and No. 3 which is overlapped, and this will cause an error, so that communication cannot be carried out. Link relay allocation No.1 No.3 No.2 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 63 39 40 39 40 No.1 No.3 Transmitted area FP Σ (Unit No. 1) Received area Transmitted area FP Σ (Unit No. 2) Received area Received area Received area Transmitted area FP Σ (Unit No. 3) Overlap Figure 214: Precautions when allocating link relay area System register No. Name Set value of various control unit No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 64 64 64 No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission 0 20 30 No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 34 FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 14 Unallowable allocations Allocations such as those shown below are not possible, either for link relays or link registers. Allocations in which the transmitted area is split Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Figure 215: Unallowable allocation example 1 Allocations in which the transmitted and received areas are split into multiple segments Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Received area Received area Received area Transmitted area Transmitted area Figure 216: Unallowable allocation example 2 FP Σ 9.3 Connection Example of PLC Link 9 - 15 9.3 Connection Example of PLC Link This section contains the connection example of PLC link. 9.3.1 Using a PLC Link with Three FP Σ Units In the example shown here, link relays are used, and when X1 of the control unit of unit no. 1 goes on, Y10 of the control unit of unit no. 2 goes on. When X2 of the control unit of unit no. 1 goes on, Y10 of the control unit of unit no. 3 goes on. X1: ON X2: ON X10: ON X10: ON Link relay L0 turns on Link relay L1 turns on FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) RS485 Figure 217: FP Σ Connection when using a PLC link with three FP Σ units Communication cassettes used with the PLC link The following types of communication cassettes can be used with the PLC link function. Name Description Part No. FP Σ Communication cassette 1–channel RS485 type This communication cassette is a 1–channel unit with a two– wire RS485 port. It supports 1 : N computer links (C–NET), general–purpose serial communication, and a PLC link. FPG–COM3 FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 16 Setting of system register When using a PLC link, the transmission format and baud rate are fixed as shown below. – Communication format; Character Bit: 8 bits, Parity: Odd, Stop Bit: 1 – Baud rate: 115200 bps Set the communication mode and the unit numbers using the system registers. Setting of unit no. and communication mode Setting of unit No. 1 “FP Σ control unit” No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 1 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port PLC link Setting of unit No. 2 “FP Σ control unit” No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 2 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port PLC link Setting of unit No. 3 “FP Σ control unit” No. Name Set value No. 410 Unit No. for COM.1 port 3 No. 412 Communication mode for COM.1 port PLC link Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PLC link function. Tip FP Σ 9.3 Connection Example of PLC Link 9 - 17 Allocation of link area Link relay allocation FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) No.1 No.3 No.2 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 19 20 63 WL0 63 39 40 39 40 No.1 No.3 Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Received area Received area Received area Transmitted area No.2 Figure 218: FP Σ Link relay allocation when using a PLC link with three FP Σ units System register No. Name Set value of various control unit No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 40 Range of link relay used for PLC link 64 64 64 No. 42 Starting no. for link relay transmission 0 20 40 No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 Link register allocation FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) Transmitted area Received area Transmitted area Received area Received area Received area Transmitted area No.1 No.3 No.2 LD0 39 40 127 No.1 No.3 No.2 LD0 39 40 127 79 80 LD0 127 79 80 Figure 219: FP Σ Link register allocation when using a PLC link with three FP Σ units System register No. Name Set value of various control unit No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 41 Range of link register used for PLC link 128 128 128 No. 44 Starting no. for link register transmission 0 40 80 No. 45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 FP Σ Communication Function 3 PLC Link Function 9 - 18 Connection diagram FP Σ (Unit No. 1) FP Σ (Unit No. 2) FP Σ (Unit No. 3) Transmission line Transmission line The final unit should be shorted between the transmission line (–) and the E terminal. The final unit should be shorted between the transmission line (–) and the E terminal. Figure 220: FP Σ Connection diagram when using a PLC link with three FP Σ units 9.3.2 Sample Programs Program of unit No. 1 “FP Σ control unit” When X1 is input, the L0 of the link relay goes on, and when X2 is input, the L1 of the link relay goes on. L0 X1 L1 X2 Unit No. 2 “control unit” begins operation Unit No. 3 “control unit” begins operation Figure 221: Sample program – unit No. 1 Program of unit No. 2 “FP Σ control unit” When the L0 of the link relay goes on, Y10 is output. Y10 L0 Y10: output Figure 222: Sample program – unit No. 2 Program of unit No. 3 “FP Σ control unit” When the L1 of the link relay goes on, Y10 is output. Y10 L1 Y10: output Figure 223: Sample program – unit No. 3 Chapter 10 Other Functions 10.1 Analog Potentiometer 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 Example Showing How the Analog Potentiometers are Used 10 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Area for Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Setting of Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 4 . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Precautions Concerning Backup of Clock/Calendar Data 10 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.4 Example Showing the Clock/ Calendar being Used 10 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Other Functions 10 - 2 FP Σ 10.1 Analog Potentiometer 10 - 3 10.1 Analog Potentiometer This section contains the overview of analog potentiometer. 10.1.1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer The FP Σ is equipped with two analog potentiometers as a standard feature. Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within a range of K0 to K1000. Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool, so this can be used, for example, with analog clocks, to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer. Analog potentiometer V0 (potentiometer 0) Changes the value of DT90040 within a range of K0 to K1000. . V1 (potentiometer 1) Changes the value of DT90041 within a range of K0 to K1000. . Figure 224: FP Σ Analog potentiometer Applicable special data register Symbol Potentiometer No. Special data register Range of change V0 Volume 0 DT90040 V1 Volume 1 DT90041 K0 to K1000 10.1.2 Example Showing How the Analog Potentiometers are Used The FP Σ is provided with special internal registers, in which the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved. If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area, a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer. Writing example of the clock setting value The value of the special internal register (DT90040) that corresponds to the analog potentiometer V0 is sent to the setting value area (SV0) of TMX0 to set the time for the clock. TMX K 999 R0 R9010 F0 MV DT 90040 , SV 0 Data transmission instruction The value of special data register DT90040 is sent to the setting value area. 0.1–second clock K999 is set as a dummy value. Figure 225: Program example of analog potentiometer FP Σ Other Functions 10 - 4 10.2 Clock/Calendar Function This section contains the clock/calendar function. 10.2.1 Area for Clock/Calendar Function If a backup battery is installed in the FP Σ , the clock/calendar function can be used. With the clock/calendar function, data indicating the hour, minute, second, day, year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs. Special data register No. Upper byte Lower byte Reading Writing DT90053 Hour data H00 to H23 Minute data H00 to H59 Available Not available DT90054 Minute data H00 to H59 Second data H00 to H59 Available Available DT90055 Day data H01 to H31 Hour data H00 to H23 Available Available DT90056 Year data H00 to H99 Month data H01 to H12 Available Available DT90057 — Day–of–the–week data H00 to H06 Available Available 10.2.2 Setting of Clock/Calendar Function There are two ways to set the clock/calendar function, as described below. Setting using FPWIN GR 1. Press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select “Set PLC Date & Time” under “Tool” on the menu bar. Set PLC Date and Time dialog box The above steps display the “Set PLC Date and Time dialog box” shown at the left. Input the date and time, and click on the “OK” button. Figure 226: FPWIN GR – Set PLC Date and Time dialog box FP Σ 10.2 Clock/Calendar Function 10 - 5 Setting and changing using program 1. The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057, which are allocated as the clock/calendar setting area, are sent. 2. A value of H8000 is written to DT90058. Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction “DF”, or by changing H8000 to H0000. Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on. X0 F0 MV H 0 , DT 90054 F0 MV H 512 , DT 90055 F0 MV H 8000 , DT 90058 DF Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds. Inputs 12th hour 5th day. Set the time. Figure 227: FP Σ Sample program of clock/calendar function 10.2.3 Precautions Concerning Backup of Clock/Calendar Data The clock/calendar values are backed up using a battery. Please be aware that these values cannot be used unless a battery has been installed in the FP Σ . No values have been set in the default settings, so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values. FP Σ Other Functions 10 - 6 10.2.4 Example Showing the Clock/Calendar being Used Sample program for Fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here, the clock/calendar function is used to output the (Y0) signal for one second, at 8:30 a.m. every day. Here, the “Hour/minute” data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time. R9010 F60 CMP DT 90053 , H 830 Y0 T0 TMX 0, K 10 DF R0 R900B Y0 R0 Data comparison instruction The value of the special data register DT90053 (Hour/ minute data) is compared with the value of H830 (8:30). Comparison match is output. Appointed time output pulse (1 second) 0.1–second type timer K10 is set and used as a 1–second clock. Figure 228: FP Σ Sample program of clock/calendar function The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the BCD format. This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B (=flag) special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time. Chapter 11 Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11.1 Self–Diagnostic Function 11 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition 11 - 3 . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 Operation on Error 11 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Flashes 11 - 5 . . . . . . 11.2.2 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Lights 11 - 7 . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 If None of the LEDs Light 11 - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.4 If Outputting does not Occur as Desired 11 - 8 . . . 11.2.5 If a Protect Error Message Appears 11 - 10 . . . . . . 11.2.6 If the Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.7 If a Transmission Error has Occurred 11 - 11 . . . . FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 2 FP Σ 11.1 Self–Diagnostic Function 11 - 3 11.1 Self–Diagnostic Function This section explains the self–diagnostic function of FP Σ . 11.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition Status indicator LEDs on control unit LED status Description Operation status RUN PROG. ERROR/ ALARM Normal Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation condition Off Light (on) Off PROG. mode Stop Flashes Flashes Off Forcing on/off in Run mode Operation Abnormal condition Off Off Flashes When a self–diagnostic error occurs Operation Off Light (on) Flashes When a self–diagnostic error occurs Stop Varies Varies Light (on) System watchdog timer has been activated Stop The control unit has a self-diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary. When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator LEDs on the control unit vary, as shown in the table above. Status indicator LED Figure 229: FP Σ Status indicator LED FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 4 11.1.2 Operation on Error Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops. The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped when a duplicated output error or operation error occurs, by setting the system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below. “PLC Configuration” setting menu on programming tool software (FPWIN GR) To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs, select “PLC Configuration” under “Option” on the menu bar, and click on the “Action on Error” tab. The screen shown below is displayed. Figure 230: FPWIN GR PLC Configuration setting screen Example 1: Allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No. 20. When operation is resumed, it will not be handled as an error. Example 2: When continuing operation even a calculation error has occured Turn off the check box for No. 26. When operation is resumed, it will be continued, but will be handled as an error. FP Σ 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 5 11.2 Troubleshooting This section explains what to do if an error occurs. 11.2.1 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Flashes Condition: The self-diagnostic error occurs. Procedure 1 Check the error contents (error code) using the programming tool “FPWIN GR”. Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR Ver. 2, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check the contents of the self–diagnosed error. Status display dialog box If the error is an operation error, the error address can be con- firmed in this dialog box. Click on the “ Clear Error ” but- ton to clear the error. Figure 231: FPWIN GR – Status display dialog box To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar. Tip next page FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 6 Procedure 2: For error code is 1 to 9 Condition: There is a syntax error in the program. Operation 1 Change to PROG. mode and clear the error. Operation 2 Execute a total–check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error. For error code is 20 or higher Condition: A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred. Operation Use the programming tool “FPWIN GR” in PROG. mode to clear the error. Using FPWIN GR Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be cleared. In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared. An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR) . If the mode selector switch has been set to the ”RUN” position, the error is cleared and at the same time operation is enabled. If the problem that caused the error has not been eliminated, it may look in some cases as though the error has not been cleared. When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error oc- curred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the “Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error. Tip FP Σ 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 7 11.2.2 If the ERROR/ALARM LED Lights Condition: The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been stopped. Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on. – If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP Σ control unit. Please contact your dealer. – If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashed, go to page 11 - 5. Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode. – If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program, referring the following: Check if instructions such as “Jump” or “LOOP” are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish. Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession. 11.2.3 If None of the LEDs Light Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply. Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP Σ control unit is in the range of the rating. – Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply. Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP Σ control unit is shared with them. – If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices. FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 8 11.2.4 If Outputting does not Occur as Desired Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side. Check of output condition 1: Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads. Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads. – If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the load. Check the load again. – If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the output section. Please contact your dealer. Check of output condition 2: Output indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool. – If the output monitored is turned on, there is probably a duplicated output error. Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input/output function. – If the output indicator LED is turned on, go to input condition check. – If the output indicator LED remains off, there is probably an abnormality in the output unit. Please contact your dealer. Check of input condition 3: Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices. Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals. – If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input unit. Please contact your dealer. – If the power is not supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply. Check the input device and input power supply. FP Σ 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 9 Check of input condition 4: Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool. – If the input monitored is off, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit. Please contact your dealer. – If the input monitored is on, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor) and check the program again, referring the following: Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high–level instruction. Check the program flow when a control instruction such as Master control relay or Jump is used. FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 10 11.2.5 If a Protect Error Message Appears When a Password Function is Used Procedure Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the “Access” radio button. Using FPWIN GR 1. Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. 2. The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to “Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button. Set PLC Password dialog box Figure 232: FPWIN GR – Set PLC Password dialog box 11.2.6 If the Program Mode does not Change to RUN Condition: A syntax error or a self–diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred. Procedure 1 Check to see if the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing. If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing, check the contents noted on page 11 - 5. Procedure 2 Execute a total–check function to determine the location of the syntax error. FP Σ 11.2 Troubleshooting 11 - 11 11.2.7 If a Transmission Error has Occurred Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+) terminals and the two (–) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected. Procedure 2 Check to see if the transmission cables are within the specifications range, referring to page 6 - 11. At this point, make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used. Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station. Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap. FP Σ Self–Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 - 12 Chapter 12 Specifications 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 General Specifications 12 - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 Performance Specifications 12 - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 I/O No. Allocation 12 - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants 12 - 12 . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 Table of System Registers 12 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 System Registers 12 - 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Table of System Registers 12 - 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 Table of Error Cords 12 - 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.1 Table of Syntax Check Error 12 - 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7.2 Table of Self–Diagnostic Error 12 - 43 . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 MEWTOCOL–COM Communication commands 12 - 66 . . 12.10 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD 12 - 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 ASCII Codes 12 - 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP Σ Specifications 12 - 2 FP Σ 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 3 12.1 Table of Specifications 12.1.1 General Specifications Item Description Rated operating voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Allowed momentary power off time 4 ms at 21.6 V, 7 ms at 24 V, 10 ms at 26.4 V Ambient temperature 0 to +55 ° C/32 to +131 ° F Storage temperature –20 to +70 ° C/–4 to +158 ° F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 % RH (non-condensing) Storage humidity 30 to 85 % RH (non-condensing) Breakdown voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute between input/output terminals and power supply/ground terminal 500 V AC for 1 minute between input and output terminals Insulation resistance Min. 100 M Ω (measured with a 500 V AC megger) between input/output terminals and power supply/ground terminals Min. 100 M Ω (measured with a 500 V AC megger) between input and output terminals Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min: double amplitude of 0.75 mm/ 0.030 in., 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m/s 2 or more, 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1,000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 μ s (based on in-house measurements) Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Weight Unit type Part No. Weight Control unit C32T Approx. 120 g/4.24 oz Expansion unit E8R/E8YR Approx. 90 g/3.17 oz E8X/E8YT/E8YP Approx. 65 g/2.29 oz E16R Approx. 105 g/3.70 oz E16T/E16P/E16X/E16YT/E16YP Approx. 70 g/2.47 oz E32T/E32P Approx. 85 g/3.00 oz FP Σ Specifications 12 - 4 Current consumption Unit type Part No. Current consumption (at 24 V DC) ( * ) Control unit C32T 90 mA or less Expansion unit E32T/E32P 40 mA or less E16T/E16P/E16YT/E16YP 25 mA or less E16R/E16X 20 mA or less E8YT/E8YP/E8R 15 mA or less E8X/E8YR 10 mA or less * Current consumption by the control unit When using expansion units, the consumption current increases by the number of expansion units. The E8R/E8YR/E16R relay–type expansion units require 50 mA (E8R) or 100 mA (E8YR, E16R) per unit, as a separate relay drive source. This current should be supplied to the each of the various units through the power supply connector for expansion unit. FP Σ 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 5 12.1.2 Performance Specifications Item Descriptions Programming method/Control method Relay symbol/Cyclic operation Controllable I/O points Basic unit Total: 32 (Input: 16/Output: 16) With expansion unit Max. 128 (The number of FP0 expansion units can be expanded to a maximum of 3.) Program memory Built–in Flash ROM (without backup battery) Program capacity 12,000 steps Number of instruction Basic 89 High–level 212 Operation speed 0.4 μ s/step (by basic instruction) Operation memory Relay External input relay (X) 512 points (The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.) points External output relay (Y) 512 points (The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.) Internal relay (R) 1,568 points (R0 to R97F) ( * Note 1) Timer/Counter (T/C) 1,024 points ( * Note 1 and 2) (initial setting is 1,008 timer points (T0 to T1007), 16 counter points (C1008 to C1023) Timer: Can count up to (in units of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 1 s) x 32767. Counter: Can count up to 1 to 32767. Link relays (L) 1,024 points ( * Note 1) Memory Data register (DT) 32,765 words (DT0 to DT32764) ( * Note 1) area Link data register (LD) 128 words ( * Note 1) Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID) Differential points Unlimited of points Master control relay points (MCR) 256 points Number of labels (JP and LOOP) 256 labels Number of step ladders 1,000 stages Number of subroutines 100 subroutines Pulse catch input 8 points (X0 to X7) Number of interrupt programs 9 programs (external input 8 points “X0 to X7”, periodical inter- rupt 1 point “0.5 ms to 30s”) Self–diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check Clock/calendar function Available (year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of week) (However, this can only be used when a battery has been installed.) ( * Note 3) Potentiometer (Volume) input 2 points, Resolution: 10 bits (K0 to K1000) Battery life 220 days or more (actual usage value: approx. 840 days (25 ° C) (Periodic replacement interval: 1 year) (value applies when no power is supplied at all) Comment input function Available (128k byte) (Without backup battery) next page FP Σ Specifications 12 - 6 Item Descriptions Link function Computer link (1:1, 1:N) ( * Note 4) General–purpose communication (1:1, 1:N) ( * Note 4) ( * Note 5) PLC link ( * Note 6) Other functions Program edition during RUN, constant scan, forced on/off and password Notes 1) If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up (counters: C1008 to C1023, internal relays: R900 to R97F, data registers: DT32710 to DT32764). When the optional battery is used, data can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. 2) The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer. 3) Precision of calender timer: – At 0  C/32  F, less than 119 second error per month. – At 25  C/77  F, less than 51 seconds error per month. – At 55  C/131  F, less than 148 seconds error per month. 4) An optional communication cassette (RS232C type) is required in order to use 1 : 1 communication. 5) An optional communication cassette (RS485 type) is required in order to use 1 : N communication. 6) An optional communication cassette (RS485 type) is required. If a communication cassette is installed and communication is being carried out, re–send processing is recommended. FP Σ 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 7 High–speed counter, pulse output and PWM output specifications Item Descriptions High– speed Input point number When using single–phase: Four channels maximum When using 2–phase: Two channels maximum counter Maximum counting speed When using single–phase: for 1 channel: 50 kHz max. (x1 ch) for 2 channels: 30 kHz max. (x2 ch) for 3 or 4 channels: 20 kHz max. (x3 to 4ch) When using 2–phase: for 1 channel: 20 kHz max. (x1 ch) for 2 channels: 15 kHz max. (x2 ch) Input contact used (* Note1) When using single–phase: X0: count input (ch0) X1: count input (ch1) X2: reset input (ch0, ch1) X3: count input (ch2) X4: count input (ch3) X5: reset input (ch2, ch3) When using 2–phase: X0, X1: count input (ch0) X2: reset input (ch0) X3, X4: count input (ch2) X5: reset input (ch2) Pulse output Output point number Two independent points (simultaneous output possible) Output mode CW and CCW mode, Pulse and Sign mode Maximum output frequency When using 1 channel: 100 kHz max. (x1 ch) When using 2 channels: 60 kHz max. (x2 ch) High–speed counter used ( * Note 2) Two–phase ch0 or ch2 Output contact used (* Note 1) X2 or X5: Home input Y0 or Y3: CW output or Pulse output Y1 or Y4: CCW output or Sigh output Y2 or Y5: Deviation counter reset output PWM output Output point number Two points (Y0, Y3) Output frequency 1.5 to 12.5k Hz (at resolution of 1000), 15.6k to 41.7k Hz (at resolution of 100) Output duty 0.0 to 99.9% (at resolution of 1000), 1 to 99% (at resolution of 100) High–speed counter used ( * Note 2) Two–phase ch0 or ch 2 Output contact used (* Note 1) Y0 or Y3 Notes 1) The contacts noted above cannot be allocated for more than one function. Also, contacts that are not assigned to the various functions can be used as general inputs/outputs. Inputs X0 to X5 are pulse catch inputs, and can also be used for interrupt input. 2) If using pulse output or PWM output, one channel of the two–phase high–speed counter is used for each output point, in each case. If only one pulse output point is being used, either one point of the two–phase high–speed counter or three points of the single–phase high–speed counter may be used. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 8 Serial communication specifications (1:1 communication) ( * Note 1) Item Description Communication method Half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line RS232C Transmission distance (total distance) 3 m/9.84 ft. Transmission speed (baud rate) 9,600 bits/s to 115.2k bits/s ( * Note 2) Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits, Parity: none/even/odd, data length: 7 bits/8 bits (* Note 2) Interface Conforming to RS232C (connected via the terminal block) Notes 1) In order to use the serial communication function (1:1 communication), a communication cassette (RS232C type) is required. 2) The baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers. Serial communication specifications (1:N communication) ( * Note 1) Item Description Communication method Two–wire, half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Twisted–pair cable or VCTF Transmission speed 9,600 bits/s to 115.2k bits/s ( * Note 2) Transmission code ASCII Transmission format Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits, Parity: none/even/odd, data length: 7 bits/8 bits (* Note 2) Number of units Maximum 32 units ( * Note 3) Interface Conforming to RS485 (connected via the terminal block) Notes 1) In order to use the serial communication function (1:N communication), a communication cassette (RS485 type) is required. 2) The baud rate and transmission format are specified using the system registers. 3) Unit numbers are specified using the system registers. Up to 31 unit numbers can be set, using the switches on the control unit. FP Σ 12.1 Table of Specifications 12 - 9 PLC link function specification ( * Note 1) Item Description Communication method Token bus Transmission method Floating master method Transmission line Twisted–pair cable Transmission distance (total distance) 80 m/2,625 ft. Transmission speed (baud rate) 115.2k bits/s Number of units Maximum 16 units ( * Note 2) PLC link capacity Link relay: 1,024 points, Link register: 128 words Interface Conforming to RS485 (connected via the terminal block) Notes 1) A communication cassette (RS485 type) is required in order to use the PLC link function. 2) Unit numbers are specified using the switches on the control unit, and the system registers. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 10 12.2 I/O No. Allocation FP Σ Control unit The allocation of the FP Σ control unit is fixed. Type of control unit I/O No. FPG–C32T Input: 16 points X0 to XF output: 16 points Y0 to YF I/O No. of FP0 expansion unit I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion I/O unit is added.The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location. Type of expansion unit I/O No. First expansion Second expansion Third expansion E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E8R Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 E8YT/E8YR/E8YP Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F E16R/E16T/E16P Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16YT/E16YP Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F E32T/E32P Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F I/O No. of FP0 analog I/O unit The I/O allocation of FP0 analog I/O unit (FP0–A21) is determined by the installation location. Unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion Input CH0: 16 points WX2 (X20 to X2F) WX4 (X40 to X4F) WX6 (X60 to X6F) CH1: 16 points WX3 (X30 to X3F) WX5 (X50 to X5F) WX7 (X70 to X7F) Output: 16 points WY2 (Y20 to Y2F) WY4 (Y40 to Y4F) WY6 (Y60 to Y6F) FP Σ 12.2 I/O No. Allocation 12 - 11 I/O No. of FP0 A/D converter unit The I/O allocation of FP0 A/D converter unit (FP0–A80) is determined by the installation location. The data of the various channels is switched and read using a program that includes the flag for switching converted data. Input channel of A/D converter unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion CH0: 16 points, CH2: 16 points, CH4: 16 points and CH6: 16 points WX2 (X20 to X2F) WX4 (X40 to X4F) WX6 (X60 to X6F) CH1: 16 points, CH3: 16 points, CH5: 16 points and CH7: 16 points WX3 (X30 to X3F) WX5 (X50 to X5F) WX7 (X70 to X7F) I/O No. of FP0 I/O link unit The I/O allocation of FP0 I/O link unit (FP0–IOL) is determined by the installation location. Unit First expansion Second expansion Third expansion Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F FP Σ Specifications 12 - 12 12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants Item No. of memory area points and range available for use Function Relay External input relay (X) 512 points (X0 to X31F) ( * Note 1) Turn on or off based on external input. External output relay (Y) 512 points (Y0 to Y31F) ( * Note 1) Externally outputs on or off state. Internal relay ( * Note 2) (R) 1,568 points (R0 to R97F) Relay which turns on or off only within program. Link relay ( * Note 2) (L) 1,024 points (L0 to L63F) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link. Timer ( * Note 2) (T) 1,024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 to C1023) ( * Note 3) This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time. It corresponds to the timer number. Counter ( * Note 2) (C) This goes on when the timer increments. It corresponds to the timer number. Special internal relay (R) 176 points (R9000 to R910F) Relay which turns on or off based on specific conditions and is used as a flag. Memory area External input relay (WX) 32 words (WX0 to WX31) ( * Note 1) Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word (16 bits) of data. External output relay (WY) 32 words (WX0 to WY31) ( * Note 1) Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word (16 bits) of data. Internal relay ( * Note 2) (WR) 98 words (WR0 to WR97) Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word (16 bits) of data. Link relay (WL) 64 words (WL0 to WL63) Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word (16 bits) of data. Data register ( * Note 2) (DT) 32,765 words (DT0 to DT32764) Data memory used in program. Data is handled in 16-bit units (one word). Link data register ( * Note 2) (LD) 128 words (LD0 to LD127) This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLO link. Data is han- dled in 16-bit units (one word). Timer/Counter set value area ( * Note 2) (SV) 1,024 words (SV0 to SV1023) Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and an initial value of a count- er. Stores by timer/counter number. Timer/Counter set value area ( * Note 2) (EV) 1,024 words (EV0 to EV1023) Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer/count- er. Stores by timer/ counter number. Special data register (DT) 260 words (DT90000 to DT90259) Data memory for storing specific data. Various settings and error codes are stored. Index register ( I ) 14 words (I0 to ID) Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier. FP Σ 12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants 12 - 13 Item Range available for use Constant Decimal constants (K) K–32768 to K32767 (for 16-bit operation) (integer type) K–2147483648 to K2147483647 (for 32-bit operation) Hexadecimal (H) H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation) constants H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation) Decimal constants (F) F–1.175494 × 10 –38 to F–3.402823 × 10 38 (monorefined real number) F1.175494 × 10 –38 to F3.402823 × 10 38 Notes 1) The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration. 2) If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up (counters: C1008 to C1023, internal relays: R900 to R97F, data registers: DT32710 to DT32764). When the optional battery is used, data can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. 3) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 14 12.4 Table of System Registers 12.4.1 System Registers What is the system register area System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program. There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used. Type of system registers Hold/non–hold type setting (System registers 5 to 8, 10, 12 and 14) The values for the timer and counter can be specified by using system register no. 5 to specify the first number of the counter. System registers no. 6 to no. 8, no. 10, no. 12, and no. 14 are used to specify the area to be held when a battery is used. Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20,23 and 26) Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error and operation error occur. Time settings (System registers 31 to 34) Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time. MEWNET –W0 PLC link settings (System registers 40 to 45, and 47) These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET–W0 PLC link communication. Note that the default value setting is “no PLC link communication” Input settings (System register 400 to 403) When using the high–speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation mode and the input number to be used as a exclusive input. Tool and COM. ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 419) Set these registers when the tool port, COM.1 and COM.2 ports are to be used for computer link, general communication, PLC link and modem communication. Note that the default value setting is “Computer link” mode. Checking and changing the set value of system register Using programming tool software 1. Set the control unit in the “PROG” mode. 2. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Option” on the menu bar. 3. When the function for which settings are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box, the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed. To change the value and setting status, write in the new value and/or select the setting status. 4. To register these settings, click on the “OK” button. FP Σ 12.4 Table of System Registers 12 - 15 Precautions for system register setting Sytem register settings are effective from the time they are set. However, MEWNET–W0 PLC link settings, input settings, tool port and COM. ports communication settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception. When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 16 12.4.2 Table of System Registers Item No. Name Default value Descriptions Hold/ 5 Starting number setting for counter 1008 0 to 1024 Non– hold 1 6 Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024 7 Hold type area starting number setting for internal relays 90 0 to 98 8 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers 32710 0 to 32765 14 Hold or non–hold setting for step ladder process Non–hold Hold/Non–hold Hold/ Non– 10 Hold type area starting number for PLC link relays 64 0 to 64 hold 2 12 Hold type area starting number for PLC link registers 128 0 to 128 Action on 20 Disable or enable setting for dupli- cated output Disabled Disabled/Enabled error 23 Operation setting when an I/O verification error occurs Stop Stop/Continuation of operation 26 Operation setting when an operation error occurs Stop Stop/Continuation of operation 4 Alarm Battery Error (Operating setting when battery error occurs) Disabled Disabled: When a battery error occurs, a self-diagnostic error is not is- sued and the ERROR/ALARM LED does not light. Enabled: When a battery error occurs, a self-diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR/ALARM LED lights. Time set- 31 Wait time setting for multi-frame com- munication 6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms ting 34 Constant value settings for scan time 0.0 ms 0: Normal scan 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each specified time interval. PLC 40 Range of link relays used for PLC link 0 0 to 64 words link set- ting 41 Range of link data registers used for PLC link 0 0 to 128 words ting 42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0 to 127 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET–W0 PLC link 16 1 to 16 FP Σ 12.4 Table of System Registers 12 - 17 Item No. Name Default value Descriptions High– speed count- er 400 High-speed counter operation mode settings (X0 to X2) CH0: Do not set in- put X0 as high–speed counter CH0 Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter. 2-phase input (X0, X1) 2-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2) Incremental input (X0) Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2) Decremental input (X0) Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2) Individual input (X0, X1) Individual input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2) Direction decision (X0, X1) Direction decision (X0, X1), Reset input (X2) CH1: Do not set in- put X1 as high–speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high- speed counter. Incremental input (X1) Incremental input (X1), Reset input (X2) Decremental input (X1) Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2) 401 High-speed counter operation mode settings (X3 to X5) CH2: Do not set in- put X3 as high–speed counter CH2 Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter. 2-phase input (X3, X4) 2-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5) Incremental input (X3) Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5) Decremental input (X3) Decremental input (X3), Reset input (X5) Individual input (X3, X4) Individual input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5) Direction decision (X3, X4) Direction decision (X3, X4), Reset input (X5) CH3: Do not set in- put X4 as high–speed counter CH3 Do not set input X4 as high- speed counter. Incremental input (X4) Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5) Decremental input (X4) Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5) FP Σ Specifications 12 - 18 Item No. Name Default value Descriptions Inter- rupt input 402 Pulse catch input settings Not set X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch input. 403 Interrupt input settings Not set (When set: on → off is valid) Specify the input contacts used as interrupt input. Specify the effective interrupt edge. X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Notes If the operation mode is set to 2–phase, individual, or direction decision, the setting for CH1 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in system register 401. If reset input settings overlap, the setting of CH1 takes precedence in system register 400 and the setting of CH3 takes precedence in system register 401. The settings for 402 and 403 are specified on the screen, for each contact. If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following precedence order is effective: [High–speed counter]  [Pulse catch]  [Interrupt input]. Example: When the high–speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode, even if input X0 is specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and input X0 functions as counter input for the high–speed counter. FP Σ 12.4 Table of System Registers 12 - 19 Item No. Name Default value Descriptions Tool 410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99 port set- 412 Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled set- ting 413 Communication format setting Character bit: 8 bits, Parity check: “with, odd” Stop bit: 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items. Character bit: 7bits/8bits Parity chk: none/with odd/with even Stop bit: 1bit/2bits 415 Communication speed (Baud rate) setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps COM. 410 Unit No. setting 1 0 to 99 1 port set- ting 412 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link General communication PLC link Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled 413 Communication format setting Character bit: 8 bits, Parity check: “with, odd” Stop bit: 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items. Character bit: 7bits/8bits Parity chk: none/with odd/with even Stop bit: 1bit/2bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to “General com- munication”. End code (Terminator): CR/CR+LF/None Start code (Header): STX not exist/STX exist 415 Communication speed (Baud rate) setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 416 Starting address for received buffer of general (serial data) communication mode 0 0 to 32764 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received of general (serial data) communication mode 2048 0 to 2048 Note The communication format when using the PLC link is fixed at the following settings: the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit. The baud rate is fixed at 115,200 bps. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 20 Item No. Name Default value Descriptions COM. 411 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99 2 port set- ting 412 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link General communication ting Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled 414 Communication format setting Character bit: 8 bits, Parity check: “with, odd” Stop bit: 1 bit Enter the settings for the various items. Character bit: 7bits/8bits Parity chk: none/with odd/with even Stop bit: 1bit/2bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to “General com- munication”. End code (Terminator): CR/CR+LF/None Start code (Header): STX not exist/STX exist 415 Communication speed (Baud rate) setting 9600 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 418 Starting address for received buffer of general (serial data) communication mode 2048 0 to 32764 419 Buffer capacity setting for data re- ceived of general (serial data) commu- nication mode 2048 0 to 2048 Note The communication format when using the PLC link is fixed at the following settings: the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit. The baud rate is fixed at 115,200 bps. FP Σ 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 21 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction. Relay No. Name Description R9000 Self-diagnostic error flag Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs. The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000. R9001 Not used R9002 Not used R9003 Not used R9004 I/O verification error flag Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs. R9005 Backup battery error flag (non-hold) Turns on for an instant when a backup battery error occurs. R9006 Backup battery error flag (hold) Turns on and keeps the on state when a backup battery error occurs. Once a battery error has been detected, this is held even after recovery has been made. It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if the system is initialized. R9007 Operation error flag (hold) Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs. The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017. (indicates the first operation error which occurred). R9008 Operation error flag (non-hold) Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs. The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs. R9009 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed. R900A > flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions. R900B = flag Turns on for an instant, – when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions. – when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions. R900C < flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions”. R900D Auxiliary timer instruction flag Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in the timing operation of the F137 (STMR)/F183 (DSTM) auxiliary timer instruction. The this flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off. R900E Tool port communication error Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred. R900F Constant scan error flag Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution. This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 22 Relay No. Name Description R9010 Always on relay Always on. R9011 Always off relay Always off. R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan R9013 Initial (on type) pulse relay This goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent scans. R9014 Initial (off type) pulse relay This goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent scans. R9015 Step ladder initial pulse relay (on type) Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process the mo- ment the step ladder process is opened. R9016 Not used R9017 Not used R9018 0.01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.01 s cycles. 0.01 s R9019 0.02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s cycles. 0.02 s R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s cycles. 0.1 s R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s cycles. 0.2 s R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 1 s cycles. 1 s R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 2 s cycles. 2 s R901E 1 min clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 1 min cycles. 1 min R901F Not used FP Σ 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 23 Relay No. Name Description R9020 RUN mode flag Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG. Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN. R9021 Not used R9022 Not used R9023 Not used R9024 Not used R9025 Not used R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed. R9027 Not used R9028 Not used R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay and timer/counter contacts. R902A Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction. R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs. R902C Not used R902D Not used R902E Not used R902F Not used FP Σ Specifications 12 - 24 Relay No. Name Description R9030 Not used R9031 Not used R9032 COM. 1 port communication mode flag This is on when the general–purpose communication function is being used. It goes off when the MEWTOCOL–COM or the PLC link function is being used. R9033 Print instruction execution flag Off: Printing is not executed. On: Execution is in progress. R9034 Run overwrite complete flag This is the special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following completion of a rewrite during the RUN operation. R9035 Not used R9036 Not used R9037 COM.1 port communication error flag This goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication. This goes off when a request is made to send data, using the F159 (MTRN) instruction. R9038 COM.1 port reception done flag during general purpose communicating Turns on when the end code is received during the general purpose communicating. R9039 COM.1 port transmission done flag during general purpose communicating This goes on when transmission has been completed when using general–purpose communication. It goes off when transmission is requested when using general– purpose communication. R903A High–speed counter control flag ch0 Turns on while the high–speed counter instructions F166 (HC15) , F167 (HC1R) and the pulse output instructions “ F171 (SPDH) to F173 (PWMH) ” are executed. R903B High–speed counter control flag ch1 Turns on while the high–speed counter instructions F166 (HC15) , F167 (HC1R) and the pulse output instructions “ F171 (SPDH) to F173 (PWMH) ” are executed. R903C High–speed counter control flag ch2 Turns on while the high–speed counter instructions F166 (HC15) , F167 (HC1R) and the pulse output instructions “ F171 (SPDH) to F173 (PWMH) ” are executed. R903D High–speed counter control flag ch3 Turns on while the high–speed counter instructions F166 (HC15) , F167 (HC1R) and the pulse output instructions “ F171 (SPDH) to F173 (PWMH) ” are executed. R903E Not used R903F Not used FP Σ 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 25 Relay No. Name Description R9040 Not used R9041 COM. 1 port PLC link flag Turns on while PLC link function is used. R9042 COM. 2 port commu- nication mode flag This goes on when the general–purpose communication function is used. It goes off when MEWTOCOL is used. R9043 to R9046 Not used R9047 COM.2 port commu- nication error flag This goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication. This goes off when a request is made to send data, using the F159 (MTRN) instruction. R9048 COM.2 port reception done flag during gen- eral purpose commu- nicating Turns on when the end code is received during the general–purpose com- munication. R9049 COM.2 port transmis- sion done flag during general purpose communicat- ing This goes on when transmission has been completed when using general– purpose communication. It goes off when transmission is requested when using general– purpose communication. R904A to R904F Not used R9050 MEWNET–W0 PLC link transmission error flag When using MEWNET-W0 – turns on when transmission error occurs at PLC link. – turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings. R9051 to R905F Not used FP Σ Specifications 12 - 26 Relay No. Name Description R9060 MEWNET–W0 PLC link transmission Unit No. 1 Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9061 assurance relay Unit No. 2 Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9062 Unit No. 3 Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9063 Unit No. 4 Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9064 Unit No. 5 Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9065 Unit No. 6 Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9066 Unit No. 7 Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9067 Unit No. 8 Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9068 Unit No. 9 Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R9069 Unit No. 10 Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906A Unit No. 11 Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906B Unit No. 12 Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906C Unit No. 13 Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906D Unit No. 14 Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906E Unit No. 15 Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. R906F Unit No. 16 Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in the PLC link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error is occurring, or when not in the PLC link mode. FP Σ 12.5 Table of Special Internal Relays 12 - 27 Relay No. Name Description R9070 MEWNET–W0 PLC link operation Unit No. 1 Turns on when unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode. R9071 mode relay Unit No. 2 Turns on when unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode. R9072 Unit No. 3 Turns on when unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode. R9073 Unit No. 4 Turns on when unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode. R9074 Unit No. 5 Turns on when unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode. R9075 Unit No. 6 Turns on when unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode. R9076 Unit No. 7 Turns on when unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode. R9077 Unit No. 8 Turns on when unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode. R9078 Unit No. 9 Turns on when unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode. R9079 Unit No. 10 Turns on when unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode. R907A Unit No. 11 Turns on when unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode. R907B Unit No. 12 Turns on when unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode. R907C Unit No. 13 Turns on when unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode. R907D Unit No. 14 Turns on when unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode. R907E Unit No. 15 Turns on when unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode. R907F Unit No. 16 Turns on when unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 28 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information. (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90000 Self–diagnostic error code The self-diagnostic error code is stored here when a self-diagnostic error occurs. A N/A DT90001 to Not used N/A N/A DT90003 DT90004 I/O verify error flag Turns on when I/O verification error occurs. A N/A DT90005 to Not used N/A N/A DT90013 DT90014 Operation auxiliary register for data shift instruction One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction, F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. A N/A DT90015 Operation auxiliary register for division instruction The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in DT90015 when the division instruction F32 (%) or F52 (B%) instruction is exe- cuted. A N/A DT90016 The divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 (D%) or F53 (DB%) is ex- ecuted. The value can be read and writ- ten by executing F0 (MV) instruction. DT90017 Operation error address (hold type) After commencing operation, the address where the first operation error occurred is stored. Monitor the address using deci- mal display. A N/A DT90018 Operation error address (non-hold type) The address where a operation error oc- curred is stored. Each time an error oc- curs, the new address overwrites the pre- vious address. At the beginning of scan, the address is 0. Monitor the address us- ing decimal display. A N/A DT90019 2.5ms ring counter The data stored here is increased by one every 2.5ms. (H0 to HFFFF) Difference between the values of the two points (absolute value) × 2.5ms = Elapsed time between the two points. A N/A DT90020 Not used N/A N/A DT90021 Not used DT90022 Scan time (current value) ( * Note) The current scan time is stored here. Scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) × 0.1ms Example: K50 indicates 5ms. A N/A FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 29 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90023 Scan time (minimum value) ( * Note) The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) × 0.1ms Example: K50 indicates 5ms. A N/A DT90024 Scan time (maximum value) ( * Note) The maximum scan time is stored here. Scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) × 0.1ms Example: K125 indicates 12.5ms. A N/A Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In the PROG. mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG. mode. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 30 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90025 Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts (INT 0 to 7) The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL instruction can be stored here. Monitor using binary display. 0: interrupt disabled (masked) 1: interrupt enabled (unmasked) 15 11 7 3 0 (Bit No.) 23 19 16 (INT No.) A N/A DT90026 Not used N/A N/A DT90027 Periodical interrupt interval (INT 24) The value set by ICTL instruction is stored. – K0: periodical interrupt is not used – K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s A N/A DT90028 Not used N/A N/A DT90029 Not used DT90030 Message 0 The contents of the specified message are stored A N/A DT90031 Message 1 in these special data registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is executed. DT90032 Message 2 instruction is executed. DT90033 Message 3 DT90034 Message 4 DT90035 Message 5 DT90036 Not used N/A N/A DT90037 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction “F96 (SRC)” The number of data that match the searched data is stored here when F96 (SRC) instruction is executed. A N/A DT90038 Operation auxiliary register for instruction “F96 (SRC)” The position of the first matching data is stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed. A N/A DT90039 Not used N/A N/A DT90040 Potentiometer (volume) input V0 The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is stored here. This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this A N/A DT90041 Potentiometer (volume) input V1 other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register. V0 → DT90040 V1 → DT90041 DT90042 Used by the system. N/A N/A DT90043 Used by the system. N/A N/A FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 31 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90044 High- speed For ch0 The elapsed value (32–bit data) for the high–speed counter is stored here. The value can be read and written by executing A A DT90045 counter elapsed value F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90046 High- speed counter For ch0 The target value (32–bit data) of the high–speed counter specified by the high–speed counter instruction is stored here. A N/A DT90047 target value Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high–speed counter related instruction F166,F167,and F171 to F173 is executed.The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90048 High- speed counter For ch1 The elapsed value (32–bit data) for the high–speed counter is stored here.The value can be read and written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. A A DT90049 counter elapsed value area F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90050 High- speed counter For ch1 The target value (32–bit data) of the high–speed counter specified by the high–speed counter instruction is stored here. A N/A DT90051 target value area Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high–speed counter related instruction F166,F167,and F171 to F173 is executed.The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90052 High–speed counter and pulse output control flag A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction to reset the high-speed counter, disable counting, continue or clear high-speed counter instruction. Software reset 0: No/1: Yes           Channel setting 0 to 3: CH0 to CH3     
      Count 0: Enable/1: Disable     !  "  "   #   # $   #   %   & ' ( Control code setting N/A A FP Σ Specifications 12 - 32 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90053 Clock/calendar monitor (hour/minute) Hour and minute data of the clock/calendar are stored here. This data is read-only data; it cannot be overwritten. Lower byte Hour data H00 to H23 Minute data H00 to H59 Higher byte A N/A DT90054 Clock/calendar setting (minute/second) The year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day-of-the- week data for the calendar timer is stored. The built-in calen- dar timer will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years. The calendar timer can be set (the time set) by writing a value using a programming tool software or a A A DT90055 Clock/calendar setting (day/hour) Higher byte Lower byte set) by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction. DT90056 Clock/calendar setting (year/month) DT90054 Minute data H00 to H59 Second data H00 to H59 DT90055 Day data H01 to H31 Hour data H00 to H23 DT90057 Clock/calendar setting (day-of-the- week) Day-of-the-week data H00 to H06 DT90056 Year data H00 to H99 Month data H01 to H12 DT90057 FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 33 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90058 Clock/calendar time setting and 30 seconds correction register The clock/calendar is adjusted as follows. When setting the clock/calendar by program By setting the the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the time be- comes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot be performed with any instruction other than F0 (MV) instruction.) Example: Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on. If you changed the values of DT90054 to DT90057 with the programming tool software, the time will be set when the new values are written. Therefore, it is unnecessary to write to DT90058. When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1, the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds. After the correction is completed, DT90058 is cleared to 0. Example: Correct to 0 seconds with X0 turns on At the time of correction, if between 0 and 29 seconds, it will be moved down, and if the between 30 and 59 seconds, it will be moved up. In the example above, if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds, it will become 5 minutes 0 second; and, if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds, it will become 6 minutes 0 second. ( DF ) [ F0 MV, H 0, DT90054 ] [ F0 MV, H8000, DT90058 ] [ F0 MV, H 512, DT90055 ] X0 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds Inputs 12th hour 5th day Sets the time X0 F0 MV, H 1, DT90058 Correct to 0 second ( DF ) A A FP Σ Specifications 12 - 34 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90059 Serial communication error code Error code is stored here when a communication error occurs. N/A N/A DT90060 Step ladder process (0 to 15) A A DT90061 Step ladder process (16 to 31) DT90062 Step ladder pro- cess (32 to 47) DT90063 Step ladder pro- cess (48 to 63) DT90064 Step ladder pro- cess (64 to 79) DT90065 Step ladder pro- cess (80 to 95) Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. DT90066 Step ladder pro- cess (96 to 111) Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the proccess starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on “1”. DT90067 Step ladder pro- cess (112 to 127) 15 11 7 3 0 (Bit No.) Monitor using binary display. Example: DT90068 Step ladder pro- cess (128 to 143) DT90060 15 11 7 3 0 (Bit No.) DT90069 Step ladder pro- cess (144 to 159) 15 11 7 3 0 (Process No.) 0: Not–executing 1: Executing DT90070 Step ladder pro- cess (160 to 175) A programming tool software can be used to write data. DT90071 Step ladder pro- cess (176 to 191) DT90072 Step ladder pro- cess (192 to 207) DT90073 Step ladder pro- cess (208 to 223) DT90074 Step ladder pro- cess (224 to 239) DT90075 Step ladder pro- cess (240 to 255) DT90076 Step ladder pro- cess (256 to 271) FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 35 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90077 Step ladder pro- cess (272 to 287) A A DT90078 Step ladder pro- cess (288 to 303) DT90079 Step ladder pro- cess (304 to 319) DT90080 Step ladder pro- cess (320 to 335) DT90081 Step ladder pro- cess (336 to 351) DT90082 Step ladder pro- cess (352 to 367) DT90083 Step ladder pro- cess (368 to 383) DT90084 Step ladder pro- cess (384 to 399) Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. DT90085 Step ladder pro- cess (400 to 415) Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the proccess starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on “1”. DT90086 Step ladder pro- cess (416 to 431) Monitor using binary display. Example: DT90087 Step ladder pro- cess (432 to 447) DT90060 15 11 7 3 0 (Bit No.) 15 11 7 3 0 (Process No.) DT90088 Step ladder pro- cess (448 to 463) 15 11 7 3 0 (Process No.) 0: Not–executing 1: Executing DT90089 Step ladder pro- cess (464 to 479) A programming tool software can be used to write data. DT90090 Step ladder pro- cess (480 to 495) DT90091 Step ladder pro- cess (496 to 511) DT90092 Step ladder pro- cess (512 to 527) DT90093 Step ladder pro- cess (528 to 543) DT90094 Step ladder pro- cess (544 to 559) DT90095 Step ladder pro- cess (560 to 575) DT90096 Step ladder pro- cess (576 to 591) DT90097 Step ladder pro- cess (592 to 607) FP Σ Specifications 12 - 36 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90098 Step ladder pro- cess (608 to 623) A A DT90099 Step ladder pro- cess (624 to 639) DT90100 Step ladder pro- cess (640 to 655) DT90101 Step ladder pro- cess (656 to 671) DT90102 Step ladder pro- cess (672 to 687) DT90103 Step ladder pro- cess (688 to 703) DT90104 Step ladder pro- cess (704 to 719) DT90105 Step ladder pro- cess (720 to 735) DT90106 Step ladder pro- cess (736 to 751) DT90107 Step ladder pro- cess (752 to 767) DT90108 Step ladder pro- cess (768 to 783) Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the proccess starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on “1”. DT90109 Step ladder pro- cess (784 to 799) process number turns on “1”. Monitor using binary display. DT90110 Step ladder pro- cess (800 to 815) 15 11 7 3 0 (Bit No.) Example: DT90111 Step ladder pro- cess (816 to 831) DT90100 DT90112 Step ladder pro- cess (832 to 847) 655 651 647 643 640 (Process No.) 0: Not–executing 1: Executing DT90113 Step ladder pro- cess (848 to 863) A programming tool software can be used to write data. DT90114 Step ladder pro- cess (864 to 879) A programming tool software can be used to write data. DT90115 Step ladder pro- cess (880 to 895) DT90116 Step ladder pro- cess (896 to 911) DT90117 Step ladder pro- cess (912 to 927) DT90118 Step ladder pro- cess (928 to 943) DT90119 Step ladder pro- cess (944 to 959) DT90120 Step ladder pro- cess (960 to 975) DT90121 Step ladder pro- cess (976 to 991) DT90122 Step ladder pro- cess (992 to 999) (Higher byte: not used) FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 37 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90123 to DT90125 Not used N/A N/A DT90126 Forced on/off operating unit No. display Used by the system. DT90127 to DT90139 Not used DT90140 MEWNET–W0 The number of times the receiving operation is performed. A N/A DT90141 PLC link status The current interval between two receiving operations: val- ue in the register × 2.5ms DT90142 The minimum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register × 2.5ms DT90143 The maximum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register × 2.5ms DT90144 The number of times the sending operation is performed. DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations: value in the register × 2.5ms DT90146 The minimum interval between two sending operations: value in the register × 2.5ms DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending operations: value in the register × 2.5ms DT90148 to DT90155 Not used N/A N/A DT90156 MEWNET–W0 Area used for measurement of receiving interval. A N/A DT90157 PLC link status Area used for measurement of sending interval. DT90158 Not used N/A N/A DT90159 DT90160 MEWNET–W0 PLC link unit No. Stores the unit No. of PLC link A N/A DT90161 MEWNET–W0 PLC link error flag Stores the error contents of PLC link A N/A DT90162 to DT90169 Not used N/A N/A FP Σ Specifications 12 - 38 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90170 MEWNET–W0 Duplicated destination for PLC inter–link address A N/A DT90171 PLC link status Counts how many times a token is lost. DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected. DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost. DT90174 No. of times undefined commands have been received DT90175 No. of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No. of times format errors have occurred in re- ceived data DT90177 No. of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No. of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to DT90189 Not used N/A N/A DT90190 High–speed counter control flag monitor for ch0 0 This monitors the data specified in DT90052. 1 2 3 4 A N/A DT90191 High–speed counter control flag monitor for ch1 DT90192 High–speed counter control flag monitor for ch2 Home near input High–speed counter instruction Pulse output 0: Invalid/1: Valid 0: Continue/1: Clear 0: Continue/1: Stop DT90193 High–speed counter control flag monitor for ch3 Hardware reset Count Software reset 0: Enable/1: Disable 0: Enable/1: Disable 0: No/1: Yes DT90194 to DT90199 Not used N/A N/A DT90200 High–speed For ch2 The elapsed value (32–bit data) for the high–speed A A DT90201 counter elapsed value counter is stored here. The value can be read and written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90202 High–speed counter target value For ch2 The target value (32–bit data) of the high–speed counter specified by the high–speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various A N/A DT90203 Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high–speed counter related instruction F166, F167, and F171 to F173 is executed. The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90204 High–speed For ch3 The elapsed value (32–bit data) for the high–speed A A DT90205 counter elapsed value counter is stored here.The value can be read and written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 39 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90206 High–speed counter target value For ch3 The target value (32–bit data) of the high–speed counter specified by the high–speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various A N/A DT90207 Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high–speed counter related instruction F166, F167, and F171 to F173 is executed. The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction. DT90208 to DT90218 Not used N/A N/A FP Σ Specifications 12 - 40 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Description Reading Writing DT90219 Unit (station) No. selection for DT90220 to DT90251 0: Unit (station) number 1 to 8, 1: Unit (station) number 9 to 16 A N/A DT90220 PLC link unit (station) No.1 System regis- ter 40 and 41 A N/A DT90221 or 9 System regis- ter 42 and 43 DT90222 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90223 System regis- ter 46 and 47 DT90224 PLC link unit (station) No.2 System regis- ter 40 and 41 DT90225 or 10 System regis- ter 42 and 43 DT90226 System regis- ter 44 and 45 The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter–link function for DT90227 System regis- ter 46 and 47 the various unit numbers are stored as shown below. DT90228 PLC link unit (station) No.3 System regis- ter 40 and 41 Example: When DT90219 is 0 DT90229 or 11 System regis- ter 42 and 43 Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to DT90223 DT90230 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90223 unit (station) number 1 DT90231 System regis- ter 46 and 47 Setting contents of system register DT90232 PLC link unit (station) No.4 System regis- ter 40 and 41 40, 42, 44, and 46 Setting contents of DT90233 or 12 System regis- ter 42 and 43 system register 41, 43, 45, and 47 DT90234 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90235 System regis- ter 46 and 47 DT90236 PLC link unit (station) No.5 System regis- ter 40 and 41 DT90237 or 13 System regis- ter 42 and 43 DT90238 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90239 System regis- ter 46 and 47 FP Σ 12.6 Table of Special Data Registers 12 - 41 (A: Available, N/A: Not available) Address Name Name Description Reading Writing DT90240 PLC link unit (station) No.6 System regis- ter 40 and 41 A N/A DT90241 or 14 System regis- ter 42 and 43 DT90242 System regis- ter 44 and 45 The contents of the system register settings DT90243 System regis- ter 46 and 47 pertaining to the PLC inter–link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below. DT90244 PLC link unit (station) No.7 System regis- ter 40 and 41 shown below. Example: When DT90219 is 0 A N/A DT90245 or 15 System regis- ter 42 and 43 Higher byte Lower byte DT90240 to DT90246 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90240 to DT90243 unit (station) number 6 DT90247 System regis- ter 46 and 47 number 6 Setting contents DT90248 PLC link unit (station) No.8 System regis- ter 40 and 41 of system register 40, 42, 44, and 46 DT90249 or 16 System regis- ter 42 and 43 Setting contents of system register 41, 43, 45, and 47 DT90250 System regis- ter 44 and 45 DT90251 System regis- ter 46 and 47 DT90252 to DT90255 Not used N/A N/A DT90256 Unit (station) No. switch monitor for COM port Used by the system. N/A N/A FP Σ Specifications 12 - 42 12.7 Table of Error Cords 12.7.1 Table of Syntax Check Error Error code Name Operation status Description and steps to take E1 Syntax error Stops A program with a syntax error has been written. Change to PROG. mode and correct the error. E2 Duplicated output error Stops Two or more OT(Out) instructions and KP(Keep) instructions are programmed using the same relay. (This also occurs if the same timer/counter number is being used.) Change to PROG. mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT instructions and KP in- structions. Or, set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20. E3 Not paired error Stops For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump ( JP and LBL ), one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position. Change to PROG. mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions. E4 Parameter mismatch error Stops An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings. For example, the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer/counter range setting. Change to PROG. mode, check the system register settings, and change so that the settings and the instruction agree. E5 Program area error Stops An instruction which must be written to a specific area (main pro- gram area or subprogram area) has been written to a different area (for example, a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction). Change to PROG. mode and enter the instruction into the cor- rect area. E8 High-level instruction operand com- bination erro r Stops There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination operands (for example, the operands must all be of a certain type). Enter the correct combination of operands. FP Σ 12.7 Table of Error Cords 12 - 43 12.7.2 Table of Self–Diagnostic Error Error code Name Opera- tion status Description and steps to take E31 Interrupt error 1 Stops An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request. A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible. Turn off the power and check the noise conditions. E32 Interrupt error 2 Stops An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request. A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible. Turn off the power and check the noise conditions. There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred. Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request. E45 Operation error Selectable Operation became impossible when a high-level instruction was executed. The causes of calculation errors vary depending on the instruction. Set the operation status using system register 26 to continue operation. E100 to E299 Self–diag- nostic error set by F148 E100 to E199 Stops The self-diagnostic error specified by the F148 (ERR) instruction is occurred. Take steps to clear the error condition according to the (ERR) instruction E200 to E299 Continues Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 44 12.8 Table of Instructions Table of Basic Instructions Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps ( * Note) Sequence basic instructions Start ST X,Y,R,L,T,C Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) contact. 1 (2) Start Not ST/ X,Y,R,L,T,C Begins a logic operation with a Form B (normally closed) contact. 1 (2) Out OT Y,R,L Outputs the operated result to the specified output. 1 (2) Not / Inverts the operated result up to this instruction. 1 AND AN X,Y,R,L,T,C Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially. 1 (2) AND Not AN/ X,Y,R,L,T,C Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact serially. 1 (2) OR OR X,Y,R,L,T,C Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel. 1 (2) OR Not OR/ X,Y,R,L,T,C Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact in parallel. 1 (2) Alternative out ALT Y,R,L A Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected. 3 AND stack ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially. 1 OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel. 1 Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this instruction. 1 Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction. 1 Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction. 1 Leading edge differential DF (DF ) Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected. 1 Trailing edge differential DF/ (DF/ ) Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected. 1 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 45 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps ( * Note) Leading edge differ- ential (initial execution type) DFI (DFI ) Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected. The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan. 1 Set SET Y,R,L < S > Output is set to and held at on. 3 Reset RST Y,R,L < R > Output is set to and held at off. 3 Keep KP Set Reset KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on. 1 No opera- tion NOP No operation. 1 Note When relay R1120 or higher, or timer T256 or higher, or counter C256 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in parentheses. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 46 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps ( * Note) Basic function instructions On-delay timer TML After set value “n” × 0.001 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on. 3 (4) TMR TMa n After set value “n” × 0.01 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on. 3 (4) TMX After set value “n” × 0.1 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on. 3 (4) TMY After set value “n” × 1 second, timer contact “a” is set to on. 4 (5) Auxiliary timer (16–bit) F137 (STMR) Y,R,L F137 STMR, S, D After set value “S” × 0.01 seconds, the specified output and R900D are set to on. 5 Auxiliary timer (32–bit) F183 (DSTM) Y,R,L F183 DSTM, S, D After set value “S” × 0.01 seconds, the specified output and R900D are set to on. 7 Counter CT Count Reset CT n Decrements from the preset value “n”. 3 (4) UP/DOWN counter F118 (UDC) UP/DOWN Count F118 UDC Reset S D Increments or decrements from the preset value “S” based on up/down input. 5 Shift register SR Data Shift SR WR n Reset Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] data to the left. 1 Left/right shift register F119 (LRSR) Data Shift Reset L/R F119 LRSR D1 D2 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range specified by “D1” and “D2” to the left or to the right. 5 Control instructions Master control relay MC (MC n) Starts the master control program. 2 Master control relay end MCE (MCE n) Master control area Ends the master control program. 2 Jump JP (JP n) The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there. 2 Label LBL (LBL n) continues from there. 1 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 47 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps ( * Note) Loop LOOP (LBL n) The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there (the number of jumps is set 4 Label LBL LOOP n, S continues from there (the number of jumps is set in “S”). 1 End ED (ED ) The operation of program is ended. Indicates the end of a main program. 1 Conditional end CNDE (CNDE ) The operation of program is ended when the trig- ger turns on. 1 Note When relay R1120 or higher, or timer T256 or higher, or counter C256 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in parentheses. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 48 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Step ladder instructions Start step SSTP )%%$*+ The start of program “n” for process control 3 Next step NSTL (NSTL n) Start the specified process “n” and clear the pro- cess currently operated. (Scan execution type) 3 NSTP ),%$*-+ Start the specified process “n” and clear the pro- cess currently operated. (Pulse execution type) 3 Clear step CSTP )#%$*+ Resets the currently operated process “n”. 3 Step end STPE )%$
**+ End of step ladder area 1 Clear multi- ple steps SCLR %#./*0 & Resets the currently operated processes “n1” to “n2”. 5 Subroutine instructions Subroutine call CALL )#1..*+ Executes the specified subroutine. When return- ing to the main program, outputs in the subrou- tine program are maintained. 2 Subroutine entry SUB )%23**+ Indicates the start of the subroutine program “n”. 1 Subroutine return RET )/
***+ Ends the subroutine program. 1 Interrupt instructions Interrupt INT ),**+ Indicates the start of the interrupt program “n”. 1 Interrupt return IRET )/
**+ Ends the interrupt program. 1 Interrupt control ICTL ICTL S1, S2 (DF) Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in “S1” and “S2” and execute. 5 Data comparison instructions 16-bit data comparison ST= 4****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”. 5 (Start) ST<> 5*6**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 ST> 6****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”. 5 ST>= 6*4**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 ST< 5****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”. 5 ST<= 5*4**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 49 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 16-bit data comparison AN= 4****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”. 5 (AND) AN<> 5*6*%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 AN> 6****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”. 5 AN>= 6*4**%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 AN< 5****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”. 5 AN<= 5*4**%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 16-bit data comparison OR= 4****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”. 5 (OR) OR<> 5*6*%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 OR> 6****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”. 5 OR>= 6*4**%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 OR< 5****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”. 5 OR<= 5*4**%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1 S2”. 5 32-bit data comparison (Start) STD= 4****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2)”. 9 STD<> 5*6**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 STD> 6****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2)”. 9 STD>= 6*4**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 STD< 5****%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2)”. 9 STD<= 5*4**%0 %& Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 50 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 32-bit data comparison (AND) AND= 4****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. 9 AND<> 5*6*%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 AND> 6****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. 9 AND>= 6*4**%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 AND< 5****%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. 9 AND<= 5*4**%0 %& Connects a contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 32-bit data comparison (OR) ORD= 4****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”. 9 ORD<> 5*6*%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 ORD> 6****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”. 9 ORD>= 6*4**%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 ORD< 5****%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”. 9 ORD<= 5*4**%0 %& Connects a contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)”. 9 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 51 Table of High–level Instructions No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data transfer instructions F0 16-bit data move MV S, D (S) → (D) 5 F1 32-bit data move DMV S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F2 16-bit data in- vert and move MV/ S, D (S) → (D) 5 F3 32-bit data in- vert and move DMV/ S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F5 Bit data move BTM S, n, D The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to the speci- fied one bit in “D”. The bit is specified by “n”. 7 F6 Hexadecimal digit (4-bit) data move DGT S, n, D The specified one digit in “S” is transferred to the speci- fied one digit in “D”. The digit is specified by “n”. 7 F7 Two 16-bit data move MV2 S1, S2, D (S1) → (D), (S2) → (D+1) 7 F8 Two 32-bit data move DMV2 S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D), (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, D+2) 11 F10 Block move BKMV S1, S2, D The data between “S1” and “S2” is transferred to the area starting at “D”. 7 F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, D2 The data of “S” is transferred to the all area between “D1” and “D2”. 7 F12 Data read from EEP–ROM/ F–ROM ICRD S1, S2, D The data stored in the EEPROM/F–ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the area starting at “D”. 11 P13 Data write to EEP–ROM/ F–ROM PICWT S1, S2, D The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the EEPROM/F–ROM starting at “D”. 11 F15 16-bit data exchange XCH D1, D2 (D1) → (D2), (D2) → (D1) 5 F16 32-bit data exchange DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1) → (D2+1, D2) (D2+1, D2) → (D1+1, D1) 5 F17 Higher/ lower byte in 16-bit data exchange SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D” are exchanged. 3 F18 16-bit data block exchange BXCH D1, D2, D3 Exchange the data between “D1” and “D2” with the data specified by “D3”. 7 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 52 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Binary arithmetic instructions F20 16-bit data addition + S, D (D) + (S) → (D) 5 F21 32-bit data addition D+ S, D (D +1, D) + (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F22 16-bit data addition + S1, S2, D (S1) + (S2) → (D) 7 F23 32-bit data addition D+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 11 F25 16-bit data subtraction – S, D (D) – (S) → (D) 5 F26 32-bit data subtraction D– S, D (D+1, D) – (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F27 16-bit data subtraction – S1, S2, D (S1) – (S2) → (D) 7 F28 32-bit data subtraction D– S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 11 F30 16-bit data multiplication * S1, S2, D (S1) × (S2) → (D+1, D) 7 F31 32-bit data multiplication D * S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 11 F32 16-bit data division % S1, S2, D (S1) ÷ (S2) → quotient (D) remainder (DT90015) 7 F33 32-bit data division D% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, S2) → quotient (D+1, D) remainder (DT90016, DT90015) 11 F34 16-bit data multiplication (result in one word) * W S1, S2, D (S1) × (S2) → (D) 7 F35 16-bit data increment +1 D (D) + 1 → (D) 3 F36 32-bit data increment D+1 D (D+1, D) + 1 → (D+1, D) 3 F37 16-bit data decrement –1 D (D) – 1 → (D) 3 F38 32-bit data decrement D–1 D (D+1, D) – 1 → (D+1, D) 3 F39 32-bit data multiplication (result in two words) D * D S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 11 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 53 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps BCD arithmetic instructions F40 4-digit BCD data addition B+ S, D (D) + (S) → (D) 5 F41 8-digit BCD data addition DB+ S, D (D+1, D) + (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F42 4-digit BCD data addition B+ S1, S2, D (S1) + (S2) → (D) 7 F43 8-digit BCD data addition DB+ S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 11 F45 4-digit BCD data subtraction B– S, D (D) – (S) → (D) 5 F46 8-digit BCD data subtraction DB– S, D (D+1, D) – (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 7 F47 4-digit BCD data subtraction B– S1, S2, D (S1) – (S2) → (D) 7 F48 8-digit BCD data subtraction DB– S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 11 F50 4-digit BCD data multiplication B * S1, S2, D (S1) × (S2) → (D+1, D) 7 F51 8-digit BCD data multiplication DB * S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 11 F52 4-digit BCD data division B% S1, S2, D (S1) ÷ (S2) → quotient (D) remainder (DT90015) 7 F53 8-digit BCD data division DB% S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, S2) → quotient (D+1, D) remainder (DT90016, DT90015) 11 F55 4-digit BCD data increment B+1 D (D) + 1 → (D) 3 F56 8-digit BCD data increment DB+1 D (D+1, D) + 1 → (D+1, D) 3 F57 4-digit BCD data decrement B–1 D (D) – 1 → (D) 3 F58 8-digit BCD data decrement DB–1 D (D+1, D) – 1 → (D+1, D) 3 Data comparison instructions F60 16-bit data comparison CMP S1, S2 (S1) > (S2) → R900A: on (S1) = (S2) → R900B: on (S1) < (S2) → R900C: on 5 F61 32-bit data comparison DCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) → R900A: on (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) → R900B: on (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) → R900C: on 9 F62 16-bit data band comparison WIN S1, S2, S3 (S1) > (S3) → R900A: on (S2) (S1) (S3) → R900B: on (S1) < (S2) → R900C: on 7 F63 32-bit data band comparison DWIN S1, S2, S3 (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3) → R900A: on (S2+1, S2) (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) → R900B: on (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) → R900C: on 13 F64 Block data comparison BCMP S1, S2, S3 Compares the two blocks beginning with “S2” and “S3” to see if they are equal. 7 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 54 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Logic operation instructions F65 16-bit data AND WAN S1, S2, D (S1) (S2) → (D) 7 F66 16-bit data OR WOR S1, S2, D (S1) (S2) → (D) 7 F67 16-bit data exclusive OR XOR S1, S2, D {(S1) (S2)} {(S1) (S2)} → (D) 7 F68 16-bit data exclusive NOR XNR S1, S2, D {(S1) (S2)} {(S1) (S2)} → (D) 7 F69 16-bit data unite WUNI S1, S2, S3, D ([S1] [S3]) ([S2] [S3]) → (D) When (S3) is H0, (S2) → (D) When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) → (D) 9 Data conversion instructions F70 Block check code calculation BCC S1, S2, S3, D Creates the code for checking the data specified by “S2” and “S3” and stores it in “D”. The calculation method is specified by “S1”. 9 F71 Hexadecimal data → ASCII code HEXA S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”. Example: HABCD → H 42 41 44 43 B A D C 7 F72 ASCII code → Hexadecimal data AHEX S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 44 43 42 41 → HCDAB D C B A 7 F73 4-digit BCD data → ASCII code BCDA S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”. Example: H1234 → H 32 31 34 33 2 1 4 3 7 F74 ASCII code → 4-digit BCD data ABCD S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 34 33 32 31 → H3412 4 3 2 1 9 F75 16-bit binary data → ASCII code BINA S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D” (area of “S2” bytes). Example: K–100 → H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 0 0 1 – 7 F76 ASCII code → 16-bit binary data ABIN S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 → K–100 0 0 1 – 7 F77 32-bit binary data → ASCII code DBIA S1, S2, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data (S1+1, S1) to ASCII code and stores it in (D+1, D). 11 F78 ASCII code → 32-bit binary data DABI S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1, D). 11 F80 16-bit binary data → 4-digit BCD data BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S” to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”. Example: K100 → H100 5 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 55 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F81 4-digit BCD data → 16-bit binary data BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by “S” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”. Example: H100 → K100 5 F82 32-bit binary data → 8-digit BCD data DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by (S+1, S) to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in (D+1, D). 7 F83 8-digit BCD data → 32-bit binary data DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1, D). 7 F84 16-bit data in- vert (comple- ment of 1) INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”. 3 F85 16-bit data complement of 2 NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3 F86 32-bit data complement of 2 DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3 F87 16-bit data ab- solute ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of “D”. 3 F88 32-bit data ab- solute DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of (D+1, D). 3 F89 16-bit data sign extension EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32 bits in (D+1, D). 3 F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”. 7 F91 7-segment decode SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-segment display and stores it in (D+1, D). 5 F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”. 7 F93 16-bit data digit combine UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the “n” words of data beginning at “S” are stored (united) in order in “D”. 7 F94 16-bit data digit distribute DIST S, n, D Each of the digits of the data of “S” are stored in (distributed to) the least significant digits of the areas beginning at “D”. 7 Character strings instruction F95 ASCII code conversion ASC S, D Twelve characters of the character constants of “S” are converted to ASCII code and stored in “D” to “D+5”. 15 Data conversion instructions F96 16-bit table data search SRC S1, S2, S3 The data of “S1” is searched for in the areas in the range “S2” to “S3” and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038. 7 F97 32-bit table data search DSRC S1, S2, S3 The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched for in the 32-bit data designated by “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and the result is stored in DT90037 and DT90038. 11 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 56 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data buffer instructions F98 Data table shift-out and compress CMPR D1, D2, D3 Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of the data between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and shifted in order toward “D2”. 7 F99 Data table shift-in and compress CMPW S, D1, D2 Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the data between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and shifted in order toward “D2”. 7 Data shift instructions F100 Right shift of n bits in a 16-bit data SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right. 5 F101 Left shift of n bits in a 16-bit data SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left. 5 F102 Right shift of n bits in a 32-bit data DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified by (D+1, D) to the right. 5 F103 Left shift of n bits in a 32-bit data DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified by (D+1, D) to the left. 5 F105 Right shift of one hexadeci- mal digit (4-bit) BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the right. 3 F106 Left shift of one hexadeci- mal digit (4-bit) BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the left. 3 F108 Right shift of multiple bits (n bits) BITR D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 7 F109 Left shift of multiple bits (n bits) BITL D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 7 F110 Right shift of one word (16-bit) WSHR D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5 F111 Left shift of one word (16-bit) WSHL D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5 F112 Right shift of one hexadeci- mal digit (4-bit) WBSR D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5 F113 Left shift of one hexadeci- mal digit (4-bit) WBSL D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5 Data buffer instructions F115 FIFO buffer define FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are defined in the buffer. 5 F116 Data read from FIFO buffer FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S” that was written to the buffer is read and stored in “D”. 5 F117 Data write into FIFO buffer FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer starting from “D”. 5 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 57 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Basic function instructions F118 UP/DOWN counter UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value preset in “S” and stores the elapsed value in “D”. 5 F119 Left/right shift register LRSR D1, D2 Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area between “D1” and “D2” as the register. 5 Data rotation instructions F120 16-bit data right rotation ROR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the right. 5 F121 16-bit data left rotation ROL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the left. 5 F122 16-bit data right rotation with carry flag data RCR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the right. 5 F123 16-bit data left rotation with carry flag data RCL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the left. 5 F125 32-bit data right rotation DROR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right. 5 F126 32-bit data left rotation DROL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left. 5 F127 32-bit data right rotation with carry flag data DRCR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right together with carry flag (R9009) data. 5 F128 32-bit data left rotation with carry flag data DRCL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left together with carry flag (R9009) data. 5 Bit manipulation instructions F130 16-bit data bit set BTS D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 1. 5 F131 16-bit data bit reset BTR D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 0. 5 F132 16-bit data bit invert BTI D, n Invert the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D”. 5 F133 16-bit data bit test BTT D, n Test the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” and output the result to R900B. 5 F135 Number of on (1) bits in 16-bit data BCU S, D Store the number of on (1) bits in the data of “S” in “D”. 5 F136 Number of on (1) bits in 32-bit data DBCU S, D Store the number of on (1) bits in the data of (S+1, S) in “D”. 7 Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary timer (16–bit) STMR S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value “S” × 0.01 sec.. 5 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 58 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Special instructions F138 Hours, minutes and seconds data to seconds data HMSS S, D Converts the hour, minute and second data of (S+1, S) to seconds data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 5 F139 Seconds data to hours, minutes and seconds data SHMS S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S) to hour, minute and second data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 5 F140 Carry flag set STC Turns on the carry flag (R9009). 1 F141 Carry flag reset CLC Turns off the carry flag (R9009). 1 F143 Partial I/O update IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number specified by “D1” to the number specified by “D2”. Only possible for I/O numbers in a range of X0 to XF and Y0 to YF. 5 F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with “S” for printing, and outputs it to the word external out- put relay WY specified by “D”. 5 F148 Self-diagnostic error set ERR n (n: K100 to K299) Stores the self-diagnostic error number “n” in DT90000 turns R9000 on, and turns on the ERROR/ALARM LED. 3 F149 Message display MSG S Displays the character constant of “S” in the connected programming tool. 13 F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, D The time after (S2+1, S2) elapses from the time of (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D). 9 F158 Time substruction CSUB S1, S2, D The time that results from subtracting (S2+1, S2) from the time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D). 9 F159 Serial data communication MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to or receive data from an external device through the specified RS232C port. 7 BIN arithmetic instruction F160 Double word (32-bit) data square root DSQR S, D √ (S) → (D) 7 High–speed counter and pulse output control instructions F0 High–speed counter and pulse output control MV S, DT90052 Performs high–speed counter control according to the control code specified by “S”. 5 F1 Change and read of the DMV S, DT90044 Transfers (S+1, S) to high–speed counter elapsed val- ue area ( * Note) (DT90045, DT90044). 7 elapsed value of high–speed counter DT90044, D Transfers value in high–speed counter elapsed value area ( * Note) (DT90045, DT90044) to (D+1, D). 7 F166 Target value much on instruction (with channel specification) HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built–in high–speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1,S). 11 F167 Target value much off instruction (with channel specification) HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built–in high–speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1,S). 11 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 59 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F171 Pulse output instruction (with channel specification) (Table shaped control and home return) SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S. 5 F172 Pulse output instruction (with channel specification) (JOG operation) PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S. 5 F173 Pulse output instruction (with channel specification) (PWM output) PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the specified output, in ac- cordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S. 5 Basic function instruction F183 Auxiliary timer (32-bit) DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D after set value “S” × 0.01 sec.. 7 Data transfer instructions F190 Three 16-bit data move MV3 S1, S2, S3, D (S1) → (D), (S2) → (D+1), (S3) → (D+2) 10 F191 Three 32-bit data move DMV3 S1, S2, S3, D (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D), (S2+1, S2) → (D+3, D+2), (S3+1, S3) → (D+5, D+4) 16 Logic operation instructions F215 32-bit data AND DAND S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 12 F216 32-bit data OR DOR S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 12 F217 32-bit data XOR DXOR S1, S2, D {(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)} {(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)} → (D+1, D) 12 F218 32-bit data XNR DXNR S1, S2, D {(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)} {(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2)} → (D+1, D) 12 F219 Double word (32-bit) data unites DUNI S1, S2, S3, D {(S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3)} {(S2+1, S2) (S3+1, S3)} → (D+1, D) 16 Note The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used. FP Σ Specifications 12 - 60 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data conversion instructions F235 16–bit binary data → Gray code conversion GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of “S” to gray codes, and the converted result is stored in the “D”. 6 F236 32–bit binary data → Gray code conversion DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of (S+1, S) to gray code, and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D). 8 F237 16–bit gray code → binary data conversion GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to binary data, and the converted result is stored in the “D”. 6 F238 32–bit gray code → binary data conversion DGBIN S, D Converts the gray code of (S+1, S) to binary data,and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D). 8 F240 Bit line to bit column conversion COLM S, n, D The values of bits line 0 to 15 of “S” are stored in bit column “n” of (D to D+15). 8 F241 Bit column to bit line conversion LINE S, n, D The values of bit column “n” of (S to S+15) are stored in bits line 0 to 15 of “D”. 8 Character strings instructions F257 Comparing character strings SCMP S1, S2 These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay. 10 F258 Character string coupling SADD S1, S2, D These instructions couple one character string with another. 12 F259 Number of characters in a character string LEN S, D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string. 6 F260 Search for char- acter string SSRC S1, S2, D The specified character is searched in a character string. 10 F261 Retrieving data from character strings (right side) RIGHT S1, S2, D These instructions retrieve a specified number of char- acters from the right side of the character string. 8 F262 Retrieving data from character strings (left side) LEFT S1, S2, D These instructions retrieve a specified number of char- acters from the left side of the character string. 8 F263 Retrieving a character string from a charac- ter string MIDR S1, S2, S3, D These instructions retrieve a character string consist- ing of a specified number of characters from the speci- fied position in the character string. 10 F264 Writing a char- acter string to a character string MIDW S1, S2, D, n These instructions write a specified number of charac- ters from a character string to a specified position in the character string. 12 F265 Replacing character strings SREP S, D, p, n A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten, starting from a specified position in the character string. 12 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 61 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum value (word data (16-bit)) MAX S1, S2, D Searches the maximum value in the word data table between the “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+1”. 8 F271 Maximum value (double word data (32-bit)) DMAX S1, S2, D Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”. 8 F272 Minimum value (word data (16-bit)) MIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+1”. 8 F273 Minimum value (double word data (32-bit)) DMIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”. 8 F275 Total and mean values (word data (16-bit)) MEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to the “S2” are stored in the “D”. 8 F276 Total and mean values (double word data (32-bit)) DMEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to “S2” are stored in the “D”. 8 F277 Sort (word data (16-bit)) SORT S1, S2, S3 The word data with sign from the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first). 8 F278 Sort (double word data (32-bit)) DSORT S1, S2, S3 The double word data with sign from the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first). 8 F282 Scaling of 16–bit data SCAL S1, S2, D These instructions search for a specified character in a character string, and carry out scaling. 8 F283 Scaling of 32–bit data DSCAL S1, S2, D These instructions search for a specified character in a character string, and carry out scaling. 10 F285 16-bit data upper and lower limit control LIMT S1, S2, S3, D When S1 S3, S1 → D When S2 S3, S2 → D When S1 S3 S2, S3 → D 10 F286 32-bit data upper and lower limit control DLIMT S1, S2, S3, D When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2) (S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3) → (D+1, D) 16 F287 16-bit data deadband control BAND S1, S2, S3, D When S1 S3, S3 – S1 → D When S2 S3, S3 – S2 → D When S1 S3 S2, 0 → D 10 F288 32-bit data deadband control DBAND S1, S2, S3, D When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) – (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2) (S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) (S2+1, S2), 0 → (D+1, D) 16 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 62 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Integer type data processing instructions F289 16-bit data zone control ZONE S1, S2, S3, D When S3 < 0, S3 + S1 → D When S3 = 0, 0 → D When S3 > 0, S3 + S2 → D 10 F290 32-bit data zone control DZONE S1, S2, S3, D When (S3+1, S3) < 0, (S3+1, S3) + (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3) = 0, 0 → (D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3) > 0, (S3+1, S3) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 16 Floating-point type real number operation instructions F309 Floating-point type data move FMV S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 8 F310 Floating-point type data addition F+ S1, S2, D ( S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 14 F311 Floating-point type data subtraction F– S1, S2, D ( S1+1, S1) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 14 F312 Floating-point type data multiplication F * S1, S2, D ( S1+1, S1) × (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 14 F313 Floating-point type data division F% S1, S2, D ( S1+1, S1) ÷ (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 14 F314 Floating-point type data sine operation SIN S, D SIN (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F315 Floating-point type data co- sine operation COS S, D COS (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F316 Floating-point type datatang- ent operation TAN S, D TAN (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F317 Floating-point type data arc- sine operation ASIN S, D SIN–1 (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F318 Floating-point type data arccosine operation ACOS S, D COS–1 (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F319 Floating-point type data arctangent operation ATAN S, D TAN–1 (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F320 Floating-point type data natu- ral logarithm LN S, D LN (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F321 Floating-point type data exponent EXP S, D EXP (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 63 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F322 Floating-point type data logarithm LOG S, D LOG (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F323 Floating-point type data power PWR S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 14 F324 Floating-point type data square root FSQR S, D (S+1, S) → (D+1, D) 10 F325 16-bit integer data to floating-point type data conversion FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data with sign specified by “S” to real number data, and the converted data is stored in “D”. 6 F326 32-bit integer data to floating-point type data conversion DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data with sign specified by (S+1, S) to real number data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F327 Floating-point type data to 16-bit integer conversion (the largest integer not exceeding the floating- point type data) INT S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point data), and the converted data is stored in “D”. 8 F328 Floating- point type data to 32-bit integer conver- sion (the largest integer not exceeding the floating- point type data) DINT S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point data), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F329 Floating- point type data to 16-bit inte- ger conversion (rounding the first decimal point down to integer) FIX S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point down), and the converted data is stored in “D”. 8 F330 Floating- point type data to 32-bit inte- ger conversion (rounding the first decimal point down to integer) DFIX S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point down), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 8 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 64 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F331 Floating-point type data to 16-bit integer conversion (rounding the first decimal point off to integer) ROFF S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point off), and the converted data is stored in “D”. 8 F332 Floating-point type data to 32-bit integer conversion (rounding the first decimal point off to integer) DROFF S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign(rounding the first decimal point off), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F333 Floating-point type data rounding the first decimal point down FINT S, D The decimal part of the real number data specified in (S+1, S) is rounded down, and the result is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F334 Floating-point type data rounding the first decimal point off FRINT S, D The decimal part of the real number data stored in (S+1, S) is rounded off, and the result is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F335 Floating-point type data sign changes F+/– S, D The real number data stored in (S+1, S) is changed the sign, and the result is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F336 Floating-point type data absolute FABS S, D Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by (S+1, S), and the result (absolute value) is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F337 Floating-point type data degree → radian RAD S, D The data in degrees of an angle specified in (S+1, S) is converted to radians (real number data), and the result is stored in (D+1, D). 8 F338 Floating-point type data radian → degree DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real number data) specified in (S+1, S) is converted to angle data in degrees, and the result is stored in (D+1, D). 8 FP Σ 12.8 Table of Instructions 12 - 65 No. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Floating-point type real number data processing instructions F345 Floating-point type data compare FCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) → R900A: on (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) → R900B: on (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) → R900C: on 10 F346 Floating-point type data band compare FWIN S1, S2, S3 (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3) → R900A: on (S2+1, S2) (S1+1, S1) (S3+1,S3) → R900B: on (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) → R900C: on 14 F347 Floating-point type data upper and lower limit control FLIMT S1, S2, S3, D When (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2) < (S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3) → (D+1, D) 18 F348 Floating-point type data dead- band control FBAND S1, S2, S3, D When (S1+1, S1) > (S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) – (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2) < (S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3) – (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1) (S3+1, S3) (S2+1, S2), 0.0 → (D+1, D) 18 F349 Floating- point type data zone control FZONE S1, S2, S3, D When (S3+1, S3) < 0.0, (S3+1, S3) + (S1+1, S1) → (D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3) = 0.0, 0.0 → (D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3) > 0.0, (S3+1, S3) + (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) 18 Process control instruction F355 PID processing PID S PID processing is performed depending on the control value (mode and parameter) specified by (S to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), and the result is stored in the (S+3). 4 Data compare instructions F373 16-bit data revision detection DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area specified by “S” has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. “D” is used to store the data of the previous execution. 6 F374 32-bit data revision detection DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area specified by (S+1, S) has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. (D+1, D) is used to store the data of the previous exe- cution. 6 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 66 12.9 MEWTOCOL–COM Communication commands Table of MEWTOCOL–COM commands Command name Code Description Read contact area RC (RCS) (RCP) (RCC) Reads the on and off status of contacts. – Specifies only one point. – Specifies multiple contacts. – Specifies a range in word units. Write contact area WC (WCS) (WCP) (WCC) Turns contacts on and off. – Specifies only one point. – Specifies multiple contacts. – Specifies a range in word units. Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area. Write data area WD Writes data to a data area. Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter. Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value. Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value. Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value. Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored. Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored. Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data. Preset contact area (fill command) SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16–point on and off pattern. Preset data area (fill command) SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range. Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register. Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register. Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs. Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller. Abort AB Aborts communication. FP Σ 12.10 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD 12 - 67 12.10 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data BCD data (Binary Coded Decimal) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0001 0000 0000 0010 0010 0000 0000 0010 0011 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0001 1010 0000 0000 0001 1011 0000 0000 0001 1100 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 0000 0001 1111 0000 0000 0010 0100 0000 0000 0010 0101 0000 0000 0010 0110 0000 0000 0010 0111 0000 0000 0010 1000 0000 0000 0010 1001 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001    63    255    9999    003F    00FF    270F    0000 0000 0011 1111    0000 0000 1111 1111    0010 0111 0000 1111    0000 0000 0110 0011    0000 0010 0101 0101    1001 1001 1001 1001 FP Σ Specifications 12 - 68 12.11 ASCII Codes b7 b6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 b5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ASCII HEX Most significant digit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 ASCII HEX code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 NUL DEL SPA CE 0 @ P ‘ p 0 0 0 1 1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q 0 0 1 0 2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r 0 0 1 1 3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s 0 1 0 0 4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t 0 1 0 1 5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u 0 1 1 0 digit 6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v 0 1 1 1 ificant d 7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w 1 0 0 0 st signi 8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x 1 0 0 1 Leas 9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y 1 0 1 0 A LF SUB * : J Z j z 1 0 1 1 B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 1 1 0 0 C FF FS , < L ¥ l | 1 1 0 1 D CR GS – = M ] m } 1 1 1 0 E SO RS . > N ^ n ~ 1 1 1 1 F SI US / ? O _ o DEL FP Σ Index I – 1 Index Numbers 1:N communication, 8 - 31 A Absolute, 5 - 25 Absolute value positioning operation, 5 - 40 Analog potentiometer, 10 - 3 Attachment of communication cassette, 6 - 10 B Backup battery, 4 - 21 Basic instructions, 12 - 44 Battery error alarm, 4 - 22 BCD data, 12 - 67 C Capacitive loads, 4 - 15 Changing the communication mode of COM. Port, 8 - 37 Clock/calendar function, 10 - 4 Command, 7 - 5, 7 - 8 Command message, 7 - 5 Communication cassette, 1 - 6, 2 - 6, 6 - 3, 6 - 6 Communication specifications of commu- nication cassette, 6 - 8 Communication status LEDs, 2 - 4 Computer link, 6 - 3, 7 - 3 Computer link (1 : N communication), 7 - 18 Connection example of PLC link, 9 - 15 Connection example with external de- vices, 8 - 16, 8 - 22 Constants, 12 - 12 Control mode, 5 - 25 Controllable I/O points, 1 - 7 Current consumption, 12 - 4 CW/CCW output method, 5 - 21 D Data transmission, 8 - 4 Data transmission to external device, 8 - 8 Decremental input mode, 5 - 9 Direction control mode, 5 - 10 E Elapsed value change and read instruc- tion (F1), 5 - 13 Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1), 5 - 33 Emergency stop circuit, 4 - 19 Error cords, 12 - 42 Expansion method, 3 - 6 F F159 (MTRN) instruction, 8 - 5 Features, 1 - 3 Flat type mounting plate, 4 - 8 FP Σ control unit, 1 - 6 Index FP Σ I – 2 G General specifications, 12 - 3 General–purpose serial communication, 6 - 4, 8 - 3 Grounding, 4 - 11, 4 - 19 H High–level instructions, 12 - 51 High–speed counter control flag erea (DT90052), 5 - 14, 5 - 34 High–speed counter control instruction (F0), 5 - 13 High–speed counter function, 5 - 3, 5 - 9 High–speed counter function specifica- tions, 5 - 5, 12 - 7 Home return, 5 - 25 Home return operation, 5 - 42 Home return operation modes, 5 - 32 I I/O allocation, 3 - 3, 5 - 12, 5 - 22, 12 - 10 Incremental  5 - 25 Incremental and decremental input mode, 5 - 10 Incremental input mode, 5 - 9 Individual input mode, 5 - 10 Inductive loads, 4 - 15 Input modes, 5 - 9 Input specifications, 2 - 7 Input wiring, 4 - 12 Installation, 4 - 3 Installation environment, 4 - 3 Installation method, 4 - 6 Installation space, 4 - 5 Instructions, 12 - 44 Interlock circuit, 4 - 19 Internal circuit diagram, 2 - 8, 2 - 10 J JOG operation, 5 - 25, 5 - 46 L LED–equipped lead switch, 4 - 13 LED–equipped limit switch, 4 - 14 Lifetime of backup battery, 4 - 23 Link area, 9 - 12 Link area allocation, 9 - 9 M Memory areas, 12 - 12 Min. input pulse width, 5 - 11 Momentary power failures, 4 - 20 O Operation on error, 11 - 4 Optional mounting plate, 4 - 7 Output specifications, 2 - 9 Output wiring, 4 - 15 P Password function, 11 - 10 Performance specifications, 12 - 5 Photoelectric sensor, 4 - 12 PLC link, 6 - 5, 9 - 3 PLC link function specifications, 6 - 9, 12 - 9 Positioning control instruction (F171), 5 - 26, 5 - 30 Programming tools, 1 - 8 Protect error, 11 - 10 Proximity sensor, 4 - 12 Pulse output, 12 - 7 FP Σ Index I – 3 Pulse output control instruction (F0), 5 - 33 Pulse output function, 5 - 3, 5 - 20 Pulse output function specifications, 5 - 6 Pulse output instruction (F172), 5 - 28 Pulse output method, 5 - 21 Pulse/Sign output method, 5 - 21 PWM output function, 5 - 3, 5 - 48 PWM output instruction, 5 - 48 PWM output specifications, 12 - 7 R Receiving data from external device, 8 - 12 Relative value positioning operation, 5 - 36, 5 - 38 Relays, 12 - 12 Removal method, 4 - 6 Response, 7 - 5 Response message, 7 - 6 Restrictions on unit combinations, 1 - 7 RUN/PROG. mode switch, 2 - 4 S Safety measures, 4 - 19 Self–diagnostic error, 11 - 5, 12 - 43 Self–diagnostic function, 11 - 3 Serial communication specifications (1:1 communication), 6 - 8, 12 - 8 Serial communication specifications (1:N communication), 6 - 8, 12 - 8 Short–circuit protective circuit, 4 - 15 Slim 30 type mounting plate, 4 - 7 Software environment, 1 - 8 Special internal relays, 12 - 21 Specifications, 12 - 3 Start up sequence, 4 - 19 Status indicator LEDs, 2 - 4, 11 - 3 Suitable cable, 1 - 8 Suitable wire, 6 - 11 Syntax check error, 12 - 42 System registers, 12 - 14 System watchdog timer, 11 - 7 T Target value match off instruction (F167), 5 - 15 Target value match on instruction (F166), 5 - 15 Terminal layout diagram, 2 - 11 Terminal station, 7 - 22 Tool port, 2 - 6 Transmission error, 11 - 11 Troubleshooting, 11 - 5 Two–phase input mode, 5 - 10 Two–wire type sensor, 4 - 13 Type I home return, 5 - 32 Type II home return, 5 - 32 U Unit (station) number setting switch, 2 - 5 Unit no., 7 - 19, 9 - 6 Unit types, 1 - 6 W Weight, 12 - 3 Wiring of communication cassette, 6 - 11 Wiring of MIL connector type, 4 - 16 Wiring of power supply, 4 - 9 Index FP Σ I – 4 Record of changes FP Σ R – 1 Record of changes Manual No. Date Description of changes ARCT1F333E/ ACG–M333E AUG. 2001 First edition FP Σ Record of changes R – 2 Please contact ......... Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. Automation Controls Company
Head Office: 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571–8686, Japan
Telephone: Japan (81) Osaka (06) 6908 - 1050
Facsimile: Japan (81) Osaka (06) 6908 - 5781 http://www.nais–e.com/ Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan. COPYRIGHT 2001 All Rights Reserved
  Europe Asia Singapore Matsushita Electric Works (Asia Pacific) Pte. Ltd. 101 Thomson Road, #25–03/05, United Square, Singapore 307591 Tel: 65–255–5473 Malaysia Matsushita Electric Works (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. Thailand Matsushita Electric Works Sales (Thailand) Co., Ltd. U.A.E. Matsushita Electric Works (Middle East) FZE. China Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Suite 201 Level 2 Tower W3, The Toners, Oriental Plaza, No.1, East Chang An Ave., Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100005 China Tel: 86–10–8518–1302, 1303 Beijing Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Shanghai Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Shanghai Branch Office Guangzhou Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Guangzhou Branch Office Dalian Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Dalian Branch Office Shenzhen Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Shenzhen Branch Office Chengdu Matsushita Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Chengdu Branch Office Hong Kong Matsushita Electric Works (Hong Kong), Ltd. Rm1601, 16/F, Tower 2, The Gateway, 25 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 852–2529–3956 Japan Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. Automation Controls Company 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma–shi, Osaka 571–8686, Japan Tel: 81–06–6908–1050 North & South America http://www.aromat.com/ http://www.mew–europe.com/ Representative Office  Indonesia  Vietnam  Philippines  India  Turkey  Brazil Germany Matsushita Electric Works (Europe) AG Rudolf–Diesel–Ring 2, D–83607 Holzkirchen, Germany Tel: 49–8024–648–0 Germany Matsushita Electric Works Deutschland G.m.b.H. United Kingdom Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd.  Ireland Matsushita Electric Works UK Ltd. Irish Branch Office Austria Matsushita Electric Works Austria G.m.b.H. Switzerland Matsushita Electric Works Schweiz AG France Matsushita Electric Works France S.A.R.L. Italy Matsushita Electric Works Italia s.r.l. Benelux Matsushita Electric Works Benelux B.V. Spain Matsushita Electric Works España S.A.  Portugal Matsushita Electric Works España S.A. Portuguese Branch Office Czech Matsushita Electric Works (CZ) s.r.o. Scandinavia Matsushita Electric Works Scandinavia AB USA Aromat Corporation 629 Central Ave., New Providence, N.J. 07974 U.S.A. Tel: 1–908–464–3550 (Headquarters)  New Jersey  Georgia  Massachusetts  Illinois  Texas  California Los Angels San Jose  Michigan Canada Aromat Canada, Inc. ARCT1F333E 200108–5ZT ACG-M333E